Flavivirus and alphavirus recombinant antigen libraries

Abstract

This invention is directed to antigen library immunization, which provides methods for obtaining antigens having improved properties for therapeutic and other uses. The methods are useful for obtaining improved antigens that can induce an immune response against pathogens, cancer, and other conditions, as well as antigens that are effective in modulating allergy, inflammatory and autoimmune diseases.

Description

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION

Pursuant to 37 C.F.R. 1.71 (e), a portion of the disclosure of this patent document contains material which is subject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document or the patent disclosure, as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Office patent file or records, but otherwise reserves all copyright rights whatsoever.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

This invention pertains to the filed of methods for developing immunogens that can induce efficient immune responses against a broad range of antigens.

2. Background

The interactions between pathogens and hosts are results of millions of years of evolution, during which the mammalian immune system has evolved sophisticated means to counterattack pathogen invasions. However, bacterial and viral pathogens have simultaneously gained a number of mechanisms to improve their virulence and survival in hosts, providing a major challenge for vaccine research and development despite the powers of modern techniques of molecular and cellular biology. Similar to the evolution of pathogen antigens, several cancer antigens are likely to have gained means to downregulate their immunogenicity as a mechanism to escape the host immune system.

Efficient vaccine development is also hampered by the antigenic heterogeneity of different strains of pathogens, driven in part by evolutionary forces as means for the pathogens to escape immune defenses. Pathogens also reduce their immunogenicity by selecting antigens that are difficult to express, process and/or transport in host cells, thereby reducing the availability of immunogenic peptides to the molecules initiating and modulating immune responses. The mechanisms associated with these challenges are complex, multivariate and rather poorly characterized. Accordingly, a need exists for vaccines that can induce a protective immune response against bacterial and viral pathogens. The present invention fulfills this and other needs.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptides that include a first antigenic determinant from a first disease-associated polypeptide and at least a second antigenic determinant from a second disease-associated polypeptide. The disease-associated polypeptides can be selected from the group consisting of cancer antigens, antigens associated with autoimmunity disorders, antigens associated with inflammatory conditions, antigens associated with allergic reactions, antigens associated with infectious agents, and other antigens that are associated with a disease condition.

In another embodiment, the invention provides a recombinant antigen library that contains recombinant nucleic acids that encode antigenic polypeptides. The libraries are typically obtained by recombining at least first and second forms of a nucleic acid which includes a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a disease-associated antigenic polypeptide, wherein the first and second forms differ from each other in two or more nucleotides, to produce a library of recombinant nucleic acids.

Another embodiment of the invention provides methods of obtaining a polynucleotide that encodes a recombinant antigen having improved ability to induce an immune response to a disease condition. These methods involve: (1) recombining at least first and second forms of a nucleic acid which comprises a polynucleotide sequence that encodes an antigenic polypeptide that is associated with the disease condition, wherein the first and second forms differ from each other in two or more nucleotides, to produce a library of recombinant nucleic acids; and (2) screening the library to identify at least one optimized recombinant nucleic acid that encodes an optimized recombinant antigenic polypeptide that has improved ability to induce an immune response to the disease condition.

The methods optionally further involve: (3) recombining at least one optimized recombinant nucleic acid with a further form of the nucleic acid, which is the same or different from the first and second forms, to produce a further library of recombinant nucleic acids; (4) screening the further library to identify at least one further optimized recombinant nucleic acid that encodes a polypeptide that has improved ability to induce an immune response to the disease condition; and (5) repeating (3) and (4), as necessary, until the further optimized recombinant nucleic acid encodes a polypeptide that has improved ability to induce an immune response to the disease condition.

In some embodiments, the optimized recombinant nucleic acid encodes a multivalent antigenic polypeptide and the screening is accomplished by expressing the library of recombinant nucleic acids in a phage display expression vector such that the recombinant antigen is expressed as a fusion protein with a phage polypeptide that is displayed on a phage particle surface; contacting the phage with a first antibody that is specific for a first serotype of the pathogenic agent and selecting those phage that bind to the first antibody; and contacting those phage that bind to the first antibody with a second antibody that is specific for a second serotype of the pathogenic agent and selecting those phage that bind to the second antibody; wherein those phage that bind to the first antibody and the second antibody express a multivalent antigenic polypeptide.

The invention also provides methods of obtaining a recombinant viral vector which has an enhanced ability to induce an antiviral response in a cell. These methods can include the steps of: (1) recombining at least first and second forms of a nucleic acid which comprise a viral vector, wherein the first and second forms differ from each other in two or more nucleotides, to produce a library of recombinant viral vectors; (2) transfecting the library of recombinant viral vectors into a population of mammalian cells; (3) staining the cells for the presence of Mx protein; and (4) isolating recombinant viral vectors from cells which stain positive for Mx protein, wherein recombinant viral vectors from positive staining cells exhibit enhanced ability to induce an antiviral response.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 shows a schematic representation of a method for generating a chimeric, multivalent antigen that has immunogenic regions from multiple antigens. Antibodies to each of the non-chimeric parental immunogenic polypeptides are specific for the respective organisms (A, B, C). After carrying out the recombination and selection methods of the invention, however, a chimeric immunogenic polypeptide is obtained that is recognized by antibodies raised against each of the three parental immunogenic polypeptides.

FIG. 2 shows the principle of family DNA shuffling. A family of antigen genes from related pathogens are subjected to shuffling, which results in a library of chimeric and/or mutated antigens. Screening methods are employed to identify those recombinant antigens that are the most immunogenic and/or cross-protective. These can, if desired, be subjected to additional rounds of shuffling and screening.

FIGS. 3A-3B shows a schematic for a method by which one can obtain recombinant polypeptides that can induce a broad-spectrum immune response. In FIG. 3A , wild-type immunogenic polypeptides from the pathogens A, B, and C provide protection against the corresponding pathogen from which the polypeptide is derived, but little or no cross-protection against the other pathogens (left panel). After shuffling, an A/B/C chimeric polypeptide is obtained that can induce a protective immune response against all three pathogen types (right panel). In FIG. 3B , shuffling is used with substrate nucleic acids from two pathogens strains (A, B), which encode polypeptides that are protective only against the corresponding pathogen. After shuffling, the resulting chimeric polypeptide can induce an immune response that is effective against not only the two parental pathogen strains, but also against a third strain of pathogen (C).

FIG. 4 diagrams some of the possible factors that can determine whether a particular polynucleotide encodes an immunogenic polypeptide having a desired property, such as enhanced immunogenicity and/or cross-reactivity. Those sequence regions that positively affect a particular property are indicated as plus signs along the antigen gene, while those sequence regions that have a negative effect are shown as minus signs. A pool of related antigen genes are shuffled and screened to obtain those that recombinant nucleic acids that have gained positive sequence regions and lost negative regions. No pre-existing knowledge as to which regions are positive or negative for a particular trait is required.

FIG. 5 shows a schematic representation of the screening strategy for antigen library screening.

FIG. 6 shows a schematic representation of a strategy for pooling and deconvolution as used in antigen library screening.

FIGS. 7A-7D show an alignment of the nucleotide sequences of glycoprotein D (gD) from HSV-1 (SEQ ID NO: 1) and HSV-2 (gD-1 (SEQ ID NO: 2) and gD-2 (SEQ ID NO: 3)), illustrating the feasibility of family shuffling when evolving gD.

FIG. 8A shows a diagram of a method for expressing HIV gp 120 using genetic vaccine vectors and generation of a library of shuffled gp 120 genes. FIG. 8B shows PCR primers that are useful for obtaining gp 120 nucleic acid substrates for DNA shuffling reactions. Primers suitable for generating substrates include 6025 F (SEQ ID NO: 4), 7773 (SEQ ID NO: 5), and primers suitable for amplifying the shuffled nucleic acids include 6196 F (SEQ ID NO: 6) and 7746 R (SEQ ID NO: 7). The primer BssH2-6205 F (SEQ ID NO: 8) can be used to clone the resulting fragment into a genetic vaccine vector.

FIG. 9 shows the domain structure of hepadnarvirus envelope genes.

FIG. 10 shows a schematic representation of the use of shuffling to obtain hepadnavirus proteins in which the immunogenicity of one antigenic domain is improved.

FIG. 11 shows a strategy in which genes that encode the hepadnavirus proteins having one antigenic domain that has improved immunogenicity are shuffled to obtain recombinant proteins in which all three domains have improved immunogenicity.

FIG. 12 shows the transmembrane organization of the HBsAg polypeptide.

FIG. 13 shows a method for using phage display to obtain recombinant allergens that are not bound by pre-existing IgE.

FIG. 14 shows a strategy for screening of recombinant allergens to identify those that are effective in activating T H cells. PBMC or T cell clones from a topic individuals are exposed to antigen-presenting cells that display the antigen variants obtained using the methods of the invention. To identify those allergen variants that are effective in activating T cells, the cultures are tested for induction of T cell proliferation or for a pattern of cytokine synthesis that is indicative of the particular type of T cell activation that is desired. If desired, the allergen variants that test positive in the in vitro assay can be subjected to in vivo testing.

FIG. 15 shows a strategy for screening of recombinant cancer antigens to identify those that are effective in activating T cells of cancer patients.

FIG. 16 A and FIG. 16B show two different strategies for generating vectors that contain multiple T cell epitopes obtained, for example, by DNA shuffling. In FIG. 16A , each individual shuffled epitope-encoding nucleic acid is linked to a single promoter, and multiple promoter-epitope gene constructs can be placed in a single vector. The scheme shown in FIG. 16B involves linking multiple epitope-encoding nucleic acids to a single promoter.

FIGS. 17A-17C shows the sequences of PreS2-S coding regions (SEQ ID NOS: 9 and 11) and corresponding amino acid sequences (SEQ ID NOS: 10 and 12) of different hepatitis B surface antigen (HGsAg) or woodchuck hepatitis B (WHV) proteins (SEQ ID NOS: 15 and 16). Primers suitable for amplification of this region are also shown (HBV, SEQ ID NOS: 13 and 14; WHV, SEQ ID NOS: 17 and 18).

FIG. 18 shows primers that are suitable for amplification of large fragments that contain the S2 S coding sequences. The primers hybridize to regions that are approximately 200 bp outside the desired sequences.

FIG. 19 shows an alignment of the amino acid sequences of surface antigens from different HBV subtypes (SEQ ID NOS: 10 and 12).

FIG. 20 shows a diagram of multimeric particles that assemble when an appropriate number of chimeric polypeptides and native HBsAg S monomers are mixed.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Definitions

The term “screening” describes, in general, a process that identifies optimal antigens. Several properties of the antigen can be used in selection and screening including antigen expression, folding, stability, immunogenicity and presence of epitopes from several related antigens. Selection is a form of screening in which identification and physical separation are achieved simultaneously by expression of a selection marker, which, in some genetic circumstances, allows cells expressing the marker to survive while other cells die (or vice versa). Screening markers include, for example, luciferase, beta-galactosidase and green fluorescent protein. Selection markers include drug and toxin resistance genes, and the like. Because of limitations in studying primary immune responses in vitro, in vivo studies are particularly useful screening methods. In these studies, the antigens are first introduced to test animals, and the immune responses are subsequently studied by analyzing protective immune responses or by studying the quality or strength of the induce immune response using lymphoid cells derived from the immunized animal. Although spontaneous selection can and does occur in the course of natural evolution, in the present methods selection is performed by man.

A “exogenous DNA segment”, “heterologous sequence” or a “heterologous nucleic acid”, as used herein, is one that originates from a source foreign to the particular host cell, or, if from the same source, is modified from its original form. Thus, a heterologous gene in a host cell includes a gene that is endogenous to the particular host cell, but has been modified. Modification of a heterologous sequence in the applications described herein typically occurs through the use of DNA shuffling. Thus, the terms refer to a DNA segment which is foreign or heterologous to the cell, or homologous to the cell but in a position within the host cell nucleic acid in which the element is not ordinarily found. Exogenous DNA segments are expressed to yield exogenous polypeptides.

The term “gene” is used broadly to refer to any segment of DNA associated with a biological function. Thus, genes include coding sequences and/or the regulatory sequences required for their expression. Genes also include nonexpressed DNA segments that, for example, form recognition sequences for other proteins. Genes can be obtained from a variety of sources, including cloning from a source of interest or synthesizing from known or predicted sequence information, and may include sequences designed to have desired parameters.

The term “isolated”, when applied to a nucleic acid or protein, denotes that the nucleic acid or protein is essentially free of other cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state. It is preferably in a homogeneous state although it can be in either a dry or aqueous solution. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein which is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. In particular, an isolated gene is separated from open reading frames which flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest. The term “purified” denotes that a nucleic acid or protein gives rise to essentially one band in an electrophoretic gel. Particularly, it means that the nucleic acid or protein is at least about 50% pure, more preferably at least about 85% pure, and most preferably at least about 99% pure.

The term “naturally-occurring” is used to describe an object that can be found in nature as distinct from being artificially produced by man. For example, a polypeptide or polynucleotide sequence that is present in an organism (including viruses, bacteria, protozoa, insects, plants or mammalian tissue) that can be isolated from a source in nature and which has not been intentionally modified by man in the laboratory is naturally-occurring.

The term “nucleic acid” refers to deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form. Unless specifically limited, the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known analogues of natural nucleotides which have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides. Unless otherwise indicated, a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g. degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences and as well as the sequence explicitly indicated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al. (1991) Nucleic Acid Res. 19: 5081; Ohtsuka et al. (1985) J. Biol. Chem. 260: 2605-2608; Cassol et a. (1992); Rossoline et al. (1994) Mol. Cell. Probes 8: 91-98). The term nucleic acid is used interchangeable with gene, cDNA, and mRNA encoded by a gene.

“Nucleic acid derived from a gene” refers to a nucleic acid for whose synthesis the gene, or a subsequence thereof, has ultimately served as a template. Thus, an mRNA, a cDNA reverse transcribed from an mRNA, and RNA transcribed from that cDNA, a DNA amplified from the cDNA, and RNA transcribed from the amplified DNA, etc., are all derived from the gene and detection of such derived products is indicative of the presence and/or abundance of the original gene and/or gene transcript in a sample.

A nucleic acid is “operably linked” when it is placed into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For instance, a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it increases the transcription of the coding sequence. Operably linked means that the DNA sequences being linked are typically contigous and, where necessary to join two protein coding regions, contiguous and in reading frame. However, since enhancers generally function when separated from the promoter by several kilobases and intronic sequences may be of variable lengths, some polynucleotide elements may be operably linked but not contiguous.

A specific binding affinity between two molecules, for example, a ligand and a receptor, means a preferential binding of one molecule for another in a mixture of molecules. The binding of the molecules can be considered specific if the binding affinity is about 1×10 4 M -1 to about 1×10 6 M -1 or greater.

The term “recombinant” when used with reference to a cell indicates that the cell replicates a heterologous nucleic acid, or expresses a peptide or protein encoded by a heterologous nucleic acid. Recombinant cells can contain genes that are not found within the native (non-combinant) form of the cell. Recombinant cells can also contain genes found in the native form of the cell wherein the genes are modified and re-introduced into the cell by artificial means. The term also encompasses cells that contain a nucleic acid endogenous to the cell that has been modified without removing the nucleic acid from the cell; such modifications include those obtained by gene replacement, site-specific mutation, and related techniques.

A “recombinant expression cassette” or simply an “expression cassette” is a nucleic acid construct, generated recombinantly or synthetically, with nucleic acid elements that are capable of effecting expression of a structural gene in hosts compatible with such sequences. Expression cassettes include at least promoters and optionally, transcription termination signals. Typically, the recombinant expression cassette includes a nucleic acid to be transcribed (e.g., a nucleic acid encoding a desired polypeptide), and a promoter. Additional factors necessary or helpful in effecting expression may also be used as described herein. For example, an expression cassette can also include nucleotide sequences that encode a signal sequence that directs secretion of an expressed protein from the host cell. Transcription termination signals, enhancers, and other nucleic acid sequences that influence gene expression, can also be included in an expression cassette.

A “multivalent antigenic polypeptide” or a “recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide” is a non-naturally occurring polypeptide that includes amino acid sequences from more than one source polypeptide, which source polypeptide is typically a naturally occurring polypeptide. At least some of the regions of different amino acid sequences constitute epitopes that are recognized by antibodies found in a mammal that has been injected with the source polypeptide. The source polypeptides from which the different epitopes are derived are usually homologous (i.e., have the same or a similar structure and/or function), and are often from different isolates, serotypes, strains, species, of organism or from different disease states, for example.

The terms “identical” or percent “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acid or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that are the same or have a specified percentage of amino acid residues or nucleotides that are the same, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence, as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by visual inspection.

The phrase “substantially identical,” in the context of two nucleic acids or polypeptides, refers to two or more sequences or subsequences that have at least 60%, preferably 80%, most preferably 90-95% nucleotide or amino acid residue identity, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence, as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by visual inspection. Preferably, the substantial identity exists over a region of the sequences that is at least about 50 residues in length, more preferably over a region of at least about 100 residues, and most preferably the sequences are substantially identical over at least about 150 residues. In some embodiments, the sequences are substantially identical over the entire length of the coding regions.

For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequence comparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are input into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. The sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identity for the test sequence(s) relative to the reference sequence, based on the designated program parameters.

Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci . USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by visual inspection (see generally Ausubel et. al., infra).

One example of an algorithm that is suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity is the BLAST algorithm, which is described in Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990). Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/). This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence. T is referred to as the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al., supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are then extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always <0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached. The BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment. The BLASTN program (for nucleotide sequences) uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 11, an expectation (E) of 10, a cutoff of 100, M=5, N=−4, and a comparison of both strands. For amino acid sequences, the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 3, an expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff & Henikoff (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci . USA 89:10915).

In addition to calculating percent sequence identity, the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin & Altshucl (1993) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci . USA 90:5873-5787). One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance. For example, a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.1, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.

Another indication that two nucleic acid sequences are substantially identical is that the two molecules hybridize to each other under stringent conditions. The phrase “hybridizing specifically to”, refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular) DNA or RNA. “Bind(s) substantially” refers to complementary hybridization between a probe nucleic acid and a target nucleic acid and embraces minor mismatches that can be accommodated by reducing the stringency of the hybridization media to achieve the desired detection of the target polynucleotide sequence.

“Stringent hybridization conditions” and “stringent hybridization wash conditions” in the context of nucleic acid hybridization experiments such as Southern and northern hybridization are sequence dependent, and are different under different environmental parameters. Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures. An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen (1993) Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology—Hybridization with Nucleic Acid Probes part I chapter 2 “Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid probe assasy”, Elsevier, N.Y. Generally, highly stringent hybridization and wash conditions are selected to be about 5° C. lower than the thermal melting point (T m ) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH. Typically, under “stringent conditions” a probe will hybridize to its target subsequence, but to no other sequences.

The T m is the temperature (under defined ionic strength and pH) at which 50% of the target sequence hybridizes to a perfectly matched probe. Very stringent conditions are selected to be equal to the T m for a particular probe. An example of stringent hybridization conditions for hybridization of complementary nucleic acids which have more than 100 complementary residues on a filter in a Southern or northern blot is 50% formamide with 1 mg of heparin at 42° C., with the hybridization being carried out overnight. An example of highly stringent wash conditions is 0.15 M NaCl at 72° C. for about 15 minutes. An example of stringent wash conditions is a 0.2 x SSC wash at 65° C. for 15 minutes (see, Sambrook, infra., for a description of SSC buffer). Often, a high stringency wash is preceded by a low stringency wash to remove background probe signal. An example medium stringency wash for a duplex of, e.g., more than 100 nucleotides, is 1 x SSC at 45° C. for 15 minutes. An example low stringency wash for a duplex of, e.g., more than 100 nucleotides, is 4-6 x SSC at 40° C. for 15 minutes. For short probes (e.g., about 10 to 50 nucleotides), stringent conditions typically involve salt concentrations of less than about 1.0 M Na + ion, typically about 0.01 to 1.0 M Na + ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7.0 to 8.3, and the temperature is typically at least about 30° C. Stringent conditions can also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide. In general, a signal to noise ratio of 2 x (or higher) than that observed for an unrelated probe in the particular hybridization assay indicates detection of a specific hybridization. Nucleic acids which do not hybridize to each other under stringent conditions are still substantially identical if the polypeptides which they encode are substantially identical. This occurs, e.g., when a copy of a nucleic acid is created using the maximum codon degeneracy permitted by the genetic code.

A further indication that two nucleic acid sequences or polypeptides are substantially identical is that the polypeptide encoded by the first nucleic acid is immunologically cross reactive with, or specifically binds to, the polypeptide encoded by the second nucleic acid. Thus, a polypeptide is typically substantially identical to a second polypeptide, for example, where the two peptides differ only by conservative substitutions.

The phrase “specifically (or selectively) binds to an antibody” or “specifically (or selectively) immunoreactive with”, when referring to a protein or peptide, refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of the protein, or an epitope from the protein, in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologics. Thus, under designated immunoassay conditions, the specified antibodies bind to a particular protein and do not bind in a significant amount to other proteins present in the sample. The antibodies raised against a multivalent antigenic polypeptide will generally bind to the proteins from which one or more of the epitopes were obtained. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody that is selected for its specificity for a particular protein. A variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a particular protein. For example, solid-phase ELISA immunoassays, Western blots, or immunohistochemistry are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a protein. See Harlow and Lane (1988) Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual , Cold Spring Harbor Publications, New York “Harlow and Lane”), for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity. Typically a specific or selective reaction will be at least twice background signal or noise and more typically more than 10 or 100 times background.

“Conservatively modified variations” of a particular polynucleotide sequence refers to those polynucleotides that encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the polynucleotide does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given polypeptide. For instance, the codons CGU, CGC, CGA, CGG, AGA, and AGG all encode the amino acid arginine. Thus, at every position where an arginine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide. Such nucleic acid variations are “silent variations,” which are one species of “conservatively modified variations.” Every polynucleotide sequence described herein which encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation, except where otherwise noted. One of skill will recognize that each codon in a nucleic acid (except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine) can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule by standard techniques. Accordingly, each “silent variation” of a nucleic acid which encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.

Further, one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions which alter, add or delete a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids (typically less than 5%, more typically less than 1%) in an encoded sequence are “conservatively modified variations” where the alterations result in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. The following five groups each contain amino acids that are conservative substitutions for one another:

Aliphatic : Glycine (G), Alanine (A), Valine (V), Leucine (L), Isoleucine (I);

Aromatic : Phenylalanine (F), Tyrosine (Y), Tryptophan (W);

Sulfur-containing : Methionine (M), Cysteine (C);

Basic : Arginine (R), Lysine (K), Histidine (H);

Acidic : Aspartic acid (D), Glutamic acid (E), Asparagine (N), Glutamine (Q).

See also, Creighton (1984) Proteins , W. H. Freeman and Company, for additional groupings of amino acids. In addition, individual substitutions, deletions or additions which alter, add or delete a single amino acid or a small percentage or amino acids in an encoded sequence are also “conservatively modified variaitons”.

A “subsequence” refers to a sequence of nucleic acids or amino acids that comprise a part of a longer sequence of nucleic acids or amino acids (e.g., polypeptide) respective.

Description of the Preferred Embodiments

The invention provides a new approach to vaccine development, which is termed “antigen library immunization.” No other technologies are available for generating libraries of related antigens or optimizing known protective antigens. The most powerful previously existing methods for identification of vaccine antigens, such as high throughput sequencing or expression library immunization, only explore the sequence space provided by the pathogen genome. These approaches are likely to be insufficient, because they generally only target single pathogen strains, and because natural evolution has directed pathogens to downregulate their own immunogenicity. In contrast, the immunization procotocols of the invention, which use shuffled antigen libraries, provide a means to identify novel antigen sequences. Those antigens that are most protective can be selected from these pools by in vivo challenge models. Antigen library immunization dramatically expands the diversity of available immunogen sequences, and therefore, these antigen chimera libraries can also provide means to defend against newly emerging pathogen variants of the future. The methods of the invention enable the identification of individual chimeric antigens that provide efficient protection against a variety of existing pathogens, providing improved vaccines for troops and civilian populations.

The methods of the invention provide an evolution-based approach, such as DNA shuffling in particular, that is an optimal approach to improve the immunogenicity of many types of antigens. For example, the methods provide means of obtaining optimized cancer antigens useful for preventing and treating malignant diseases. Furthermore, an increasing number of self-antigens, causing autoimmune diseases, and allergens, causing atopy, allergy and asthma, have been characterized. The immunogenicity and manufacturing of these antigens can likewise be improved with the methods of this invention.

The antigen library immunization methods of the invention provide a means by which one can obtain a recombinant antigen that has improved ability to induce an immune response to a pathogenic agent. A “pathogenic agent” refers to an organism or virus that is capable of infecting a host cell. Pathogenic agents typically include and/or encode a molecule, usually a polypeptide, that is immunogenic in that an immune response is raised against the immunogenic polypeptide. Often, the immune response raised against an immunogenic polypeptide from one serotype of the pathogenic agent is not capable of recognizing, and thus protecting against, a different serotype of the pathogenic agent, or other related pathogenic agents. In other situations, the polypeptide produced by a pathogenic agent is not produced in sufficient amounts, or is not sufficiently immunogenic, for the infected host to raise an effective immune response against the pathogenic agent.

These problems are overcome by the methods of the invention, which typically involve recombining two or more forms of a nucleic acid that encode a polypeptide of the pathogenic agent, or antigen involved in another disease or condition. These recombination methods, referred to herein as “DNA shuffling”, use as substrates forms of the nucleic acid that differ from each other in two or more nucleotides, so a library of recombinant nucleic acids results. The library is then screened to identify at least one optimized recombinant nucleic acid that encodes an optimized recombinant antigen that has improved ability to induce an immune response to the pathogenic agent or other condition. The resulting recombinant antigens often are chimeric in that they are recognized by antibodies (Abs) reacting against multiple pathogen strains, and generally can also elicit broad sprectrum immune responses. Specific neutralizing antibodies are known to mediate protection against several pathogens of interest, although additional mechanisms, such as cytotoxic T lymphocytes, are likely to be involved. The concept of chimeric, multivalent agntigens inducing broadly reacting antibody responses is further illustrated in FIG. 1 .

In preferred embodiments, the different forms of the nucleic acids that encode antigenic polypeptides are obtained from members of a family of related pathogenic agents. This scheme of performing DNA shuffling using nucleic acids from related organisms, known as “family shuffling,” is described in Crameri et al. ((1998) Nature 391:288-291) and is shown schematically in FIG. 2 . Polypeptides of different strains and serotypes of pathogens generally vary between 60-98%, which will allow for efficient family DNA shuffling. Therefore, family DNA shuffling provides an effective approach to generate multivalent, crossprotective antigens. The methods are useful for obtaining individual chimeras that effectively protect against most or all pathogen variants (FIG. 3 A). Moreover, immunizations using entire libraries or pools of shuffled antigen chimeras can also result in identification of chimeric antigens that protect against pathogen variants that were not included in the starting population of antigens (for example, protection against strain C by shuffled library of chimeras/mutants of strains A and B in FIG. 3 B). Accordingly, the antigen library immunization approach enables the development of immunogenic polypeptides that can induce immune responses against poorly characterized, newly emerging pathogen variants.

Sequence recombination can be achieved in many different formats and permutations of formats, as described in further detail below. These formats share some common principles. For example, the targets for modification vary in different applications, as does the property sought to be acquired or improved. Examples of candidate targets for acquisition of a property or improvement in a property include genes that encode proteins which have immunogenic and/or toxigenic activity when introduced into a host organism.

The methods use at least two variant forms of a starting target. The variant forms of candidate substrates can show substantial sequence or secondary structural similarity with each other, but they should also differ in at least one and preferably at least two positions. The initial diversity between forms can be the result of natural variation, e.g., the different variant forms (homologs) are obtained from different individuals or strains of an organism, or constitute related sequences from the same organism (e.g., allelic variations), or constitute homologs from different organisms (interspecific variants). Alternatively, initial diversity can be induce, e.g., the variant forms can be generated by error-prone transcription, such as an error-prone PCR or use of a polymerase which lacks proof-reading activity (see, Liao (1990) Gene 88:107-111), of the first variant form, or, by replication of the first form in a mutator strain (mutator host cells are discussed in further detail below, and are generally well known). A mutator strain can include any mutants in any organism impaired in the functions of mismatch repair. These include mutant gene products of mutS, mutT, mutH, mutL, ovrD, dcm, vsr, umuC, umuD, sbcB, recJ, etc. The impairment is achieved by genetic mutation, allelic replacement, selective inhibition by an added reagent such as a small compound or an expressed antisense RNA, or other techniques. Impairment can be of the genes noted, or of homologous genes in any organism. Other methods of generating initial diversity include methods well known to those of skill in the art, including, for example, treatment of a nucleic acid with a chemical or other mutagen, through spontaneous mutation, and by inducing an error-prone repair system (e.g., SOS) in a cell that contains the nucleic acid. The initial diversity between substrates is greatly augmented in subsequent steps of recombination for library generation.

Properties Involved in Immunogenicity

The effectiveness of an antigen in inducing an immune response against a pathogen can depend upon several factors, many of which are note well understood. Most previously available methods for increasing the effectiveness of antigens are dependent upon understanding the molecular basis for these factors. However, DNA shuffling and antigen library immunization according to the methods of the invention are effective even where the molecular bases are unknown. The methods of the invention do not rely upon a priori assumptions.

Polynucleotide sequences that can positively or negatively affect the immunogenicity of an antigen encoded by the polynucleotide are often scattered throughout the entire antigen gene. Several of these factors are shown diagrammatically in FIG. 4 . By recombining different forms of polynucleotide that encode the antigen using DNA shuffling, followed by selection for those chimeric polynucleotides that encode an antigen that can induce an improved immune response, one can obtain primarily sequences that have a positive influence on antigen immunogenicity. Those sequences that negatively affect antigen immunogenicity are eliminated (FIG. 4 ). One need not know the particular sequences involved.

DNA Shuffling Methods

Generally, the methods of the invention entail performing DNA recombination (“shuffling”) and screening or selection to “evolve” individual genes, whole plasmids or viruses, multigene clusters, or even whole genomes (Stemmer (1995) Bio/Technology 13:549-553). Reiterative cycles of recombination and screening/selection can be performed to further evolve the nucleic acids of interest. Such techniques do not require the extensive analysis and computation required by conventional methods for polypeptide engineering. Shuffling allows the recombination of large numbers of mutations in a minimum number of selection cycles, in contrast to natural pair-wise recombination events (e.g., as occur during sexual replication). Thus, the sequence recombination techniques described herein provide particular advantages in that they provide recombination between mutations in any or all of these, thereby providing a very fast way of exploring the manner in which different combinations of mutations can affect a desired result. In some instances, however, structural and/or functional information is available which, although not required for sequence recombination, provides opportunities for modification of the technique.

The DNA shuffling methods of the invention can involve at least one of at least four different approaches to improve immunogenic activity as well as to broaden specificity. First, DNA shuffling can be performed on a single gene. Secondly, several highly homologous genes can be identified by sequence comparison with known homologous genes. These genes can be synthesized and shuffled as a family of homologs, to select recombinants with the desired activity. The shuffled genes can be cloned into appropriate host cells, such as E. coli , yeast, plants, fungi, animal cells, and the like, and those that encode antigens having the desired properties can be identified by the methods described below. Third, whole genome shuffling can be performed to shuffled genes that encode antigenic polypeptides (along with other genomic nucleic acids). For whole genome shuffling approaches, it is not even necessary to identify which genes are being shuffled. Instead, e.g., bacterial cell or vial genomes are combined and shuffled to acquire recombinant polypeptides that have enhanced ability to induce an immune response, as measured in any of the assays described below. Fourth, antigenic polypeptide-encoding genes can be codon modified to access mutational diversity not present in any naturally occurring gene. Details on each of these procedures can be found below.

Exemplary formats and examples for sequence recombination, sometimes referred to as DNA shuffling, evolution, or molecular breeding, have been described by the present inventors and co-workers in co-pending applications U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 08/198,431, filed Feb. 17, 1994, Ser. No. PCT/US95/02126, filed, Feb. 17, 1995, Ser. No. 08/425,684, filed Apr. 18, 1995, Ser. No. 08/537,874, filed Oct. 30, 1995. Ser. No. 08/564,955, filed Nov. 30, 1995, Ser. No. 08/621,859, filed Mar. 25, 1996, Ser. No. 08/621,430, filed Mar. 25, 1996, Ser. No. PCT/US96/05480, filed Apr. 18, 1996, Ser. No. 08/650,400, filed May 20, 1996, Ser. No. 08/675,502, filed Jul. 3, 1996, Ser. No. 08/721,824, filed Sep. 27, 1996, Ser. No. PCT/US97/17300, filed Sep. 26, 1997, and Ser. No. PCT/US97/24239, filed Dec. 17, 1997; Stemmer, Science 270:1510 (1995); Stemmer et al., Gene 164:49-53 (1995); Stemmer, Bio/Technology 13:549-553 (1995); Stemmer, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci . U.S.A. 91:10747-10751 (1994); Stemmer, Nature 370:389-391 (1994); Crameri et al., Nature Medicine 2(1):1-3 (1996); Crameri et al., Nature Biotechnology 14:315-319 (1996), each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

Other methods for obtaining recombinant polynucleotides and/or for obtaining diversity in nucleic acids used as the substrates for shuffling include, for example, homologous recombination (PCT/US98/05223; Publ. No. WO98/42727); oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis (for review see, Smith, Ann. Rev. Genet. 19: 423-462 (1985); Botstein and Shortle, Science 229: 1193-1201 (1985); Carter, Biochem. J. 237: 1-7 (1986); Kunkel, “The efficiency of oligonucleotide directed mutagenesis” in Nucleic acids & Molecular Biology , Eckstein and Lilley, eds., Springer Verlag, Berlin (1987)). Included among these methods are oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis (Zoller and Smith, Nucl. Acids Res. 10: 6487-6500 (1982), Methods in Enzymol. 100: 468-500 (1983), and Methods in Enzymol. 154: 329-350 (1987)) phosphothiaote-modified DNA mutagenesis (Taylor et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 13: 8749-8764 (1985); Taylor et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 13: 8765-8787 (1985); Nakamaye and Eckstein, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 9679-9698 (1986); Sayers et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16: 791-802 (1988); Sayers et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16: 803-814 (1988)), mutagenesis using uracil-containing templates (Kunkel, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci . USA 82: 488-492 (1985) and Kunkel et al. Methods in Enzymol. 154: 367-382)); mutagenesis using gapped duplex DNA (Kramer et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 12: 9441-9456 (1984); Kramer and Fritz, Methods in Enzymol. 154: 350-367 (1987); Kramer et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16: 7207 (1988)); and Fritz et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16: 6987-6999 (1988)). Additional suitable methods include point mismatch repair (Kramer et al., Cell 38: 879-887 (1984)), mutagenesis using repair-deficient host strains (Carter et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 13: 4431-4443 (1985); Carter, Methods in Enzymol. 154: 382-403 (1987)), deletion mutagenesis (Eghtedarzadeh and Henikoff, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 5115 (1986)), restriction-selection and restriction-purification (Wells et al., Phil. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. A 317: 415-423 (1986)), mutagenesis by total gene synthesis (Nambiar et al., Science 223: 1299-1301 (1984); Sakamar and Khorana, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 6361-6372 (1988); Wells et al., Gene 34: 315-323 (1985); and Grundström et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 13: 3305-3316 (1985). Kits for mutagenesis are commercially available (e.g., Bio-Rad, Amersham International, Anglian Biotechnology).

The breeding procedures starts with at least two substrates that generally show some degree of sequence identity to each other (i.e., at least about 30%, 50%, 70%, 80% or 90% sequence identity), but differ from each other at certain positions. The difference can be any type of mutation, for example, substitutions, insertions and deletions. Often, different segments differ from each other in about 5-20 positions. For recombination to generate increased diversity relative to the starting materials, the starting materials must differ from each other in at least two nucleotide positions. That is, if there are only two substrates, there should be at least two divergent positions. If there are three substrates, for example, one substrate can differ from the second at a single position, and the second can differ from the third at a different single position. The starting DNA segments can be natural variants of each other, for example, allelic or species variants. The segments can also be from nonallelic gene showing some degree of structural and usually functional relatedness (e.g., different genes within a superfamily, such as the family of Yersinia V-antigens, for example). The starting DNA segments can also be induced variants of each other. For example, one DNA segment can be produced by error-prone PCR replication of the other, the nucleic acid can be treated with a chemical or other mutagen, or by substitution of a mutagenic cassette. Induced mutants can also be prepared by propagating one (or both) of the segments in a mutagenic strain, or by inducing an error-prone repair system in the cells. In these situations, strictly speaking, the second DNA segment is not a single segment but a large family of related segments. The different segments forming the starting materials are often the same length or substantially the same length. However, this need not be the case; for example; one segment can be a subsequence of another. The segments can be present as part of larger molecules, such as vectors, or can be in isolated form.

The starting DNA segments are recombined by any of the sequence recombination formats provided herein to generate a diverse library of recombinant DNA segments. Such a library can vary widely in size from having fewer than 10 to more than 10 5 , 10 9 , 10 12 or more members. In some embodiments, the starting segments and the recombinant libraries generated will include full-length coding sequences and any essential regulatory sequences, such as a promoter and polyadenylation sequence, required for expression. In other embodiments, the recombinant DNA segments in the library can be inserted into a common vector providing sequences necessary for expression before performing screening/selection.

Substrates for Evolution of Optimized Recombinant Antigens

The invention provides methods of obtaining recombinant polynucleotides that encode antigens that exhibit improved ability to induce an immune response to a pathogenic agent. The methods are applicable to a wide range of pathogenic agents, including potential biological warfare agents and other organisms and polypeptides that can cause disease and toxicity in humans and other animals. The following examples are merely illustrative, and not limiting.

1. Bacterial Pathogens and Toxins

In some embodiments, the methods of the invention are applied to bacterial pathogens, as well as to toxins produced by bacteria and other organisms. One can use the methods to obtain recombinant polypeptides that can induce an immune response against the pathogen, as well as recombinant toxins that are less toxic than native toxin polypeptides. Often, the polynucleotides of interest encode polypeptides that are present on the surface of the pathogenic organism.

Among the pathogens for which the methods of the invention are useful for producing protective immunogenic recombinant polypeptides are the Yersinia species. Yersinia pestis , the causative agent of plague, is one of the most virulent bacteria known with LD 50 values in mouse of less than 10 bacteria. The pneumonic form of the disease is readily spread between humans by aerosol or infectious droplets and can be lethal within days. A particularly preferred target for obtaining a recombinant polypeptide that can protect against Yersinia infection is the V antigen, which is a 37 kDa virulence factor, induces protective immune responses and is currently being evaluated as a subunit vaccine (Brubaker (1991) Current Investigations of the Microbiology of Yersinae, 12: 127). The V-antigen alone is not toxic, but Y. pestis isolates that lack the V-antigen are avirulent. The Yersinia V-antigen has been successfully produced in E. coli by several groups (Leary et a. (1995) Infect. Immun. 3: 2854). Antibodies that recognize the V-antigen can provide passive protection against homologous strains, but not against heterologous strains. Similarly, immunization with purified V antigen protects against only homologous strains. To obtain cross-protective recombinant V antigen, in a preferred embodiment, V antigen genes from various Yersinia species are subjected to family shuffling. The genes encoding the V antigen from Y. pestis, Y. enterocolitica , and Y. pseudotuberculosis , for example, are 92-99% identical at the DNA level, making them ideal for optimization using family shuffling according to the methods of the invention. After shuffling, the library of recombinant nucleic acids is screend and/or selected for those that encode recombinant V antigen polypeptides that can induce an improved immune response and/or have greater cross-protectivity.

Bacillus anthracis , the causative agent of anthrax, is another example of a bacterial target against which the methods of the invention are useful. The anthrax protective antigen (PA) provides protective immune responses in test animals, and antibodies against PA also provide some protection. However, the immunogenicity of PA is relatively poor, so multiple injections are typically required when wild-type PA is used. Co-vaccination with lethal factor (LF) can improve the efficacy of wild-type PA vaccines, but toxicity is a limiting factor. Accordingly the DNA shuffling and antigen library immunization methods of the invention can be used to obtain nontoxic LF. Polynucleotides that encode LF from various B. anthracis strains are subjected to family shuffling. The resulting library of recombinant LF nucleic acids can then be screened to identify those that encode recombinant LF polypeptides that exhibit reduced toxicity. For example, one can inoculate tissue culture cells with the recombinant LF polypeptides in the presence of PA and select those clones for which the cells survive. If desired, one can then backcross the nontoxic LF polypeptides to retain the immunogenic epitopes of LF. Those that are selected through the first screen can then be subjected to a secondary screen. For example, one can test for the ability of the recombinant nontoxic LF polypeptides to induce an immune response (e.g., CTL or antibody response) in a test animal such as mice. In preferred embodiments, the recombinant nontoxic LF polypeptides are then tested for ability to induce protective immunity in test animals against challenge by different strains of B. anthracis.

The protective antigen (PA) of B. anthracis is also a suitable target for the methods of the invention. PA-encoding nucleic acids from various strains of B. anthracis are subjected to DNA shuffling. One can then screen for proper folding in, for example, E. coli, using polyclonal antibodies. Screening for ability to induce broad-spectrum antibodies in a test animal is also typically used, either alone or in addition to a preliminary screening method. In presently preferred embodiments, those recombinant polynucleotides that exhibit the desired properties can be backcrossed so that the immunogenic epitopes are maintained. Finally, the selected recombinants are tested for ability to induce protective immunity against different strains of B. anthracis in a test animal.

The Staphylococcus aureus and Streptococcus toxins are another example of a target polypeptide that can be altered using the methods of the invention. Strains of Staphylococcus aureus and group A Streptococci are involved in a range of diseases, including food poisoning, toxic shock syndrome, scarlet fever and various autoimmune disorders. They secrete a variety of toxins, which include at least five cytolytic toxins, a coagulase, and a variety of enterotoxins. The enterotoxins are classified as supperantigens in that they crosslink MHC class II molecules with T cell receptors to cause a constitutive T cell activation (Fields et al. (1996) Nature 384: 188). This results in the accumulation of pathogenic levels of cytokines that can lead to multiple organ failure and death. At least thirty related, yet distinct enterotoxins have been sequenced and can be phylogenetically grouped into families. Crystal structures have been obtained for several members alone and in complex with MHC class II molecules. Certain mutations in the MHC class II-binding site of the toxins strongly reduce their toxicity and can form the basis of attenuated vaccines (Woody et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 133). However, a successful immune response to one type of toxin may provide protection against closely related family members, whereas little protection against toxins from the other families is observed. Family shuffling of enterotoxin genes from various family members can be used to obtain recombinant toxin molecules that have reduced toxicity and can induce a cross-protective immune response. Shuffled antigens can also be screened to identify antigens that elicit neutralizing antibodies in an appropriate animal model such as mouse or monkey. Examples of such assays can include ELISA formats in which the elicited antibodies prevent binding of the enterotoxin to the MHC complex and/or T cell receptors on cells or purified forms. These assays can also include formats where the added antibodies would prevent T cells from being cross-lined to appropriate antigen presenting cells.

Chloera is an ancient, potentially lethal disease caused by the bacterium Vibrio chloerae and an effective vaccine for its prevention is still unavailable. Much of the pathogenesis of this disease is caused by the cholera enterotoxin. Ingestion of microgram quantities of cholera toxin can induce severe diarrhea causing loss of tens of liters of fluid. Cholera toxin is a complex of a single catalytic A subunit with a pentameric ring of identical B subunits. Each subunit is inactive on its own. The B subunits bind to specific ganglioside receptors on the surface of intestinal epithelial cells and trigger the entry of the A subunit into the cell. The A subunit ADP-ribosylates a regulatory G protein initiating a cascade of events causing a massive, sustained flow of electrolytes and water into the intestinal lumen resulting in extreme diarrhea.

The B subunit of cholera toxin is an attractive vaccine target for a number of reasons. It is a major target of protective antibodies generated during cholera infection and contains the epitopes for antitoxin neutralizing antibodies. It is nontoxic without the A subunit, is orally effective, and stimulates production of a strong IgA-dominated gut mucosal immune response, which is essential in protection against cholera and cholera toxin. The B subunit is also being investigated for use as an adjuvant in other vaccine preparations, and therefore, evolved toxins may provide general improvements for a variety of different vaccines. The heat-labile enterotoxins (LT) from enterotoxigenic E. coli strains are structurally related to cholera toxin and are 75% identical at the DNA sequence level. To obtain optimized recombinant toxin molecules that exhibit reduced toxicity and increased ability to induce an immune response that is protective against V. cholerae and E. coli , the genes that encode the related toxins are subjected to DNA shuffling.

The recombinant toxins are then tested for one or more of a several desirable traits. For example, one can screen for improved cross-reactivity of antibodies raised against the recombinant toxin polypeptides, for lack of toxicity in a cell culture assay, and for ability to induce a protective immune response against the pathogens and/or against the toxins themselves. The shuffled clones can be selected by phage display and/or screen by phage ELISA and ELISA assays for the presence of epitopes from the different serotypes. Variant proteins with multiple epitopes can then be purified and used to immunize mice or other test animal. The animal serum is then assayed for antibodies to the different B chain subtypes and variants that elicit a broad cross-reactive response will be evaluated further in a virulent challenge model. The E. coli and V. cholerae toxins can also act as adjuvants that are capable of enhancing mucosal immunity and oral delivery of vaccines and proteins. Accordingly, one can test the library of recombinant toxins for enhancement of the adjuvant activity.

Shuffled antigens can also be screened for improved expression levels and stability of the B chain pentamer, which may be less stable than when in the presence of the A chain in the hexameric complex. Addition of a heat treatment step or denaturing agents such as salts, urea, and/or guanidine hydrochloride can be included prior to ELISA assays to measure yields of correctly folded molecules by appropriate antibodies. It is sometimes desirable to screen for stable monomeric B chain molecules, in an ELISA format, for example, using antibodies than bind monomeric, but not pentameric B chains. Additionally, the ability of shuffled antigens to elicit neutralizing antibodies in an appropriate animal model such as mouse or monkey can be screened. For example, antibodies that bind to the B chain and prevent its binding to its specific ganglioside receptors on the surface of intestinal epithelial cells may prevent disease. Similarly antibodies that bind to the B chain and prevent its pentamerization or block A chain binding may be useful in preventing disease.

The bacterial antigens that can be improved by DNA shuffling for use as vaccines also include, but are not limited to, Helicobacter pylori antigens CagA and VacA (Blaser (1996) Aliment. Pharmacol . Ther. 1: 73-7; Blaser and Crabtree (1996) Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 106: 565-7; Censini et al. (1996) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 14684-14643). Other suitable H. pylori antigens include, for example, four immunoreactive proteins of 45-65 kDa as reported by Catha et al. (1997) Indian J. Med. Res. 105: 170-175 and the H. pylori GroES homologue (HspA) (Kansau et al. (1996) Mol. Microbiol. 22: 1013-1023. Other suitable bacterial antigens include, but are not limited to, the 43-kDa and the fimbrilin (41 kDa) proteins of P. gingivalis (Boutsl et al. (1996) Oral Microbiol. Immunol. 11: 236-241); pneumococcal surface protein A (Briles et al. (1996) Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 797: 118-126); Chlamydia psittaci antigens, 80-90 kDa protein and 110 kDa protein (Buendia et al. (1997) FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 150: 113-9); the chlamydial exoglycolipid antigen (GLXA) (Whittum-Hudson et al. (1996) Nature Med. 2: 1116-1121); Chlamydia pneumoniae species-specific antigens in the molecular weight ranges 92-98, 51-55, 43-46 and 31.5-33 kDa and genus-specific antigens in the ranges 12, 26 and 65-70 kDa (Halme et al. (1997) Scand. J. Immunol. 45: 378-84); Neisseria gonorrhoeae (GC) or Escherichia coli phase-variable opacity (Opa) proteins (Chen and Gotschlich (1996) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 14851-14856), any of the twelve immunodominant proteins of Schistosoma mansoni (ranging in molecular weight from 14 to 208 kDa) as described by Cutts and Wilson (1997) Parasitology 114: 245-55; the 17-kDa protein antigen of Brucella abortus (De Mot et al. (1996) Curr. Microbiol. 33: 26-30); a gene homolog of the 17-kDa protein antigen of the Gram-negative pathogen Brucella abortus identified in the nocardioform actinomycete Rhodococcus sp. NI86/21 (De Mot et al. (1996) Curr. Microbiol. 33: 26-30); the staphylococcal enterotoxins (SEs) (Wood et al. (1997) FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 17: 1-10), a 42-kDa M. hyopneumoniae NrdF ribonucleotide reductase R2 protein or 15-kDa subunit protein of M. hyopneumoniae (Fagan et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 2502-2507), the meningococcal antigen PorA protein (Feavers et al. (1997) Clin. Diagn. Lab. Immunol. 3: 444-50); pneumococcal surface protein A (PspA) (McDaniel et al. (1997) Gene Ther. 4: 375-377); F. tularensis outer membrane protein FopA (Fulop et al. (1996) FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 13: 245-247); the major outer membrane protein within stains of the genus Actinobacillus (Hartmann et al. (1996) Zentralbl. Bakteriol. 284: 255-262); p60 or listeriolysin (Hly) antigen of Listeria monocytogenes (Hess et al. (1996) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 1458-1463); flagellar (G) antigens observed on Salmonella enteritidis and S. pullorum (Holt and Chaubal (1997) J. Clin. Microbiol. 35: 1016-1020); Bacillus anthracis protective antigen (PA) (Ivins et al. (1996) Vaccine 13: 1779-1784); Echinococcus granulosus antigen 5 (Jones et al. (1996) Parasitology 113: 213-222); the rol genes of Shigella dysenteriae 1 and Escherichia coli K-12 (Klee et al. (1997) J. Bacteriol. 179: 2421-2425); cell surface proteins Rib and alpha of group B streptococcus (Larsson et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 3518-3523); the 37 kDa secreted polypeptide encoded on the 70 kb virulence plasmid of pathogenic Yersinia spp. (Leary et al. (1995) Contrib. Microbiol. Immunol. 13: 216-217 and Roggenkamp et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 446-51); the OspA (outer surface protein A) of the Lyme disease spirochete Borrelia burgdorferi (Li et al. (1997) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 3584-3589, Padilla et al. (1996) J. Infect. Dis. 174: 739-746, and Wallich et al. (1996) Infection 24: 396-397); the Brucella melitensis group 3 antigen gene encoding Omp28 (Lindler et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 2490-2499); the PAc antigen of Streptococcus mutans (Murakami et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 794-797); pneumolysin, Pneumococcal neuraminidases, autolysin, hyaluronidase, and the 37 kDa pneumococcal surface adhesin A (Paton et al. (1997) Microb. Drug Resist. 3: 1-10); 29-32, 41-45, 63-71 x 10(3) MW antigens of Salmonella typhi (Perez et al. ( 1996) Immunology 89: 262-267); K-antigen as a marker of Klebsiella pneumoniae (Priamukhina and Morozova ( 1996) Klin. Lab. Diagn. 47-9): nocardial antigens of molecular mass approximately 60, 40, 20 and 15-10 kDa (Prokesova et al. (1996) Int. J. Immunopharmacol. 18: 661-668); Staphylococcus aureus antigen ORF-2 (Rieneck et al. (1997) Biochim Biophys Acta 1350: 128-132); GlpQ antigen of Borrelia hermsii (Schwan et al. (1996) J. Clin. Microbiol. 34: 2483-2492); cholera protective antigen (CPA) (Sciortino (1996) J. Diarrhoeal Dis. Res. 14: 16-26); a 190-kDa protein antigen of Streptococcus mutans (Senpuka et al. (1996) Oral Microbiol. Immunol. 11: 121-128); Anthrax toxin protective antigen (PA) (Sharma et al. (1996) Protein Expr. Purif. 7: 33-38); Clostridium perfringens antigens and toxoid (Strom et al. (1995) Br. J. Rheumatol. 34: 1095-1096); the SEF14 fimbrial antigen of Salmonella enteritidis (Thorns et al. (1996) Microb. Pathog. 20: 235-246); the Yersinia pestis capsular antigen (F1 antigen) (Titball et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 65: 1926-1930); a 35-kilodalton protein of Mycobacterium leprae (Triccas et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 5171-5177); the major outer membrane protein, CD, extracted from Moraxella (Branhemella) catarrhalis (Yang et al. (1997) FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 17: 187-199); pH6 antigen (PsaA) protein) of Yersinia pestis (Zav'yalov et al. (1996) FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 14: 53-57); a major surface glycoprotein, gp63, of Leishmania major (Xu and Liew (1994) Vaccine 12: 1534-1536; Xu and Liew (1995) Immunology 84: 173-176); mycobacterial heat shock protein 65, mycobacterial antigen ( Mycobacterium leprae hsp65) (Lowrie et al. (1994) Vaccine 12: 1537-1540; Ragno et al. (1997) Arthritis Rheum. 40: 277-283; Silva (1995) Braz. J. Med. Biol. Res. 28: 843-851); Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigen 85 (Ag85) (Huygen et al. (1996) Nat. Med. 2: 893-898); the 45/47 kDa antigen complex (APA) of Mycobacterium tuberculosis, M. bovis and BCG (Horn et al. (1996) J. Immunol. Methods 197: 151-159); the mycobacterial antigen, 65-kDa heat shock protein, hsp65 (Tascon et al. (1996) Nat. Med. 2: 888-892); the mycobacterial antigens MPB64, MPB70, MPB57 and alpha antigen (Yamada et al. (1995) Kekkaku 70: 639-644); the M. tuberculosis 38 kDa protein (Vordermeier et al. (1995) Vaccine 13: 1576-1582); the MPT63, MPT64 and MPT59 antigens from Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Manca et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 16-23; Oettinger et al. (1997) Scand. J. Immunol. 45: 499-503; Wilcke et al. (1996) Tuber. Lung Dis. 77: 250-256); the 35-kilodalton protein of Mycobacterium leprae (Triccas et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 5171-5177); the ESAT-6 antigen of virulent mycobacteria (Brandt et al. (1996) J. Immunol. 157: 3527-3533; Pollock and Andersen (1997) J. Infect. Dis. 175: 1251-1254); Mycobacterium tuberculosis 16-kDa antigen (Hsp16.3) (Chang et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 7218-7223); and the 18-kilodalton protein of Mycobacterium leprae (Baumgart et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 2274-2281).

2. Viral Pathogens

The methods of the invention are also useful for obtaining recombinant nucleic acids and polypeptides that have enhanced ability to induce an immune response against viral pathogens. While the bacterial recombinants described above are typically administered in polypeptide form, recombinants that confer viral protection are preferably administered in nucleic acid form, as genetic vaccines.

One illustrative example is the Hantaan virus. Glycoproteins of this virus typically accumulate at the membranes of the Golgi apparatus of infected cells. This poor expression of the glycoprotein prevents the development of efficient genetic vaccines against these viruses. The methods of the invention solve this problem by performing DNA shuffling on nucleic acids that encode the glycoproteins and identifying those recombinants that exhibit enhanced expression in a host cell, and/or for improved immunogenicity when administered as a genetic vaccine. A convenient screening method for these methods is to express the recombinant polynucleotides as fusion proteins to PIG, which results in display of the polypeptides on the surface of the host cell (Whitehorn et al. (1995) Biotechnology (NY) 13: 1215-19). Fluorescence-activated cell sorting is then used to sort and recover those cells that express an increased amount of the antigenic polypeptide on the cell surface. This preliminary screen can be followed by immunogenicity tests in mammals, such as mice. Finally, in preferred embodiments, those recombinant nucleic acids are tested as genetic vaccines for their ability to protect a test animal against challenge by the virus.

The flaviviruses are another example of a viral pathogen for which the methods of the invention are useful for obtaining a recombinant polypeptide or genetic vaccine that is effective against a viral pathogen. The flaviviruses consist of three clusters of antigenically related viruses: Dengue 1-4 (62-77% identity), Japanese, St. Louis and Murray Valley encephalitis viruses (75-82% identity), and the tick-borne encephalitis viruses (77-96% identity). Dengue virus can induce protective antibodies against SLE and Yellow fever (40-50% identity), but few efficient vaccines are available. To obtain genetic vaccines and recombinant polypeptides that exhibit enhanced cross-reactivity and immunogenicity, the polynucleotides that encode envelope proteins of related viruses are subjected to DNA shuffling. The resulting recombinant polynucleotides can be tested, either as genetic vaccines or by using the expressed polypeptides, for ability to induce a broadly reacting neutralizing antibody response. Finally, those clones that are favorable in the preliminary screens can be tested for ability to protect a test animal against viral challenge.

Viral antigens that can be evolved by DNA shuffling for improved activity as vaccines include, but are not limited to, influenza A virus N2 neuraminidase (Kilbourne et al. (1995) Vaccine 13: 1799-1803); Dengue virus envelope (E) and premembrane (prM) antigens (Feighny et al. (1994) Am. J. Trop. Med. Hyg. 50: 322-328; Putnak et al. (1996) Am. J. Trop. Med. Hyg. 55: 504-10); HIV antigens Gag, Pol, Vif and Nef (Vogt et al. (1995) Vaccine 13: 202-208); HIV antigens gp120 and gp160 (Achour et al. (1995) Cell. Mol. Biol. 41: 395-400; Hone et al. (1994) Dev. Biol. Stand. 82: 159-162); gp41 epitope of human immunodeficiency virus (Eckhart et al. (1996) J. Gen. Virol. 77: 2001-2008); rotavirus antigen VP4 (Mattion et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69: 5132-5137); the rotavirus protein VP7 or VP7sc (Emslie et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69: 1747-1754; Xu et al. (1995) J. Gen. Virol. 76: 1971-1980); herpes simplex virus (HSV) glycoproteins gB, gC, gD, gE, gG, gH, and gI (Fleck et al. (1994) med. Microbiol. Immunol. (Berl) 183: 87-94 [Mattion, 1995]; Ghiasi et al. (1995) Invest. Ophthalmol. Vis. Sci. 36: 1352-1360; McLean et al. (1994) J. Infect. Dis. 170: 1100-1109); immediate-early protein ICP47 of herpes simplex virus-type 1 (HSV-1) (Banks et al. (1994) Virology 200: 236-245); immediate-early (IE) proteins ICp27, ICP0, and ICP4 of herpes simplex virus (Manickan et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69: 4711-4716); influenza virus nucleoprotein and hemagglutinin (Deck et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 71-78; Fu et al. (1997) J. Virol. 71: 2715-2721); B19 parvovirus capsid proteins VP1 (Kawase et al. (1995) Virology 211: 359-366) or VP2 (Brown et al. (1994) Virology 198: 477-488); Hepatitis B virus core and e antigen (Schodel et al. (1996) Intervirology 39: 104-106); hepatitis B surface antigen (Shiau and Murray (1997) J. Med. Virol. 51: 159-166); hepatitis B surface antigen fused to the core antigen of the virus (Id.); Hepatitis B virus core-preS2 particles (Nemeckova et al. (1996) Acta Virol. 40: 273-279); HBV preS2-S protein (Kutinova et al. (1996) Vaccine 14: 1045-1052); VZV glycoprotein I (Kutinova et al. (1996) Vaccine 14: (1045-1052 ); rabies virus glycoproteins (Xiang et al. (1994) Virology 199: 132-140; Xuan et al. (1995) Virus Res. 36: 151-161) or ribonucleocapsid (Hooper et al. (1994) Proc. Nat'l. Acad Sci. USA 91: 10908-10912); human cytomegalovirus (HCMV) glycoprotein B (UL55) (Britt et al. (1995) J. Infect. Dis. 171: 18-25); the hepatitis C virus (HCV) nucleocapsid protein in a secreted or a nonsecreted form, or as a fusion protein with the middle (pre-S2 and S) or major (S) surface antigens of hepatitis B virus (HBV) (Inchauspe et al. (1997) DNA Cell Biol. 16: 185-195; Major et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69: 5798-5805); the hepatitis C virus antigens: the core protein (pC); E1 (pE1) and E2 (pE2) alone or as fusion proteins (Saito et al. (1997) Gastroenterology 112: 1321-1330); the gene encoding respiratory syncytial virus fusion protein (PFP-2) (Falsey and Walsh (1996) Vaccine 14: 1214-1218; Piedra et al. (1996) Pediatr. Infect. Dis. J. 15: 23-31); the VP6 and VP7 genes of rotaviruses (Choi et al. (1997) Virology 232: 129-138; Jin et al. (1996) Arch. Virol. 141: 2057-2076); the E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6 and E7 proteins of human papillomavirus (Brown et al. (1994) Virology 201: 46-54; Dillner et al. (1995) Cancer Detect. Prev. 19: 381-393; Krul et al. (1996) Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 43: 44-48; Nakagawa et al. (1997) J. Infect. Dis. 175: 927-931); a human T-lymphotropic virus type I gag protein (Porter et al. (1995) J. Med. Virol. 45: 469-474); Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) gp340 (Mackett et al. (1996) J. Med. Virol. 50: 263-271); the Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) latent membrane protein LMP2 (Lee et al. (1996) Eur. J. Immunol. 26: 1875-1883); Epstein-Barr virus nuclear antigens 1 and 2 (Chen and Cooper (1996) J. Virol. 70: 4849-4853; Khanna et al. (1995) Virology 214: 633-637); the measles virus nucleoprotein (N) (Fooks et al. (1995) Virology 210: 456-465); and cytomegalovirus glycoprotein gB (Marshall et al. (1994) J. Med. Virol. 43: 77-83) or glycoprotein gH (Rasmussen et al. (1994) J. Infect. Dis. 170: 673-677).

3. Parasites

Antigens from parasites can also be optimized by the methods of the invention. These includes, but are not limited to, the schistosome gut-associated antigens CAA (circulating anodic antigen) and CCA (circulating cathodic antigen) in Schistosoma mansoni, S. haematobium or S. japonicum (Deelder et al. (1996) Parasitology 112: 21-35); a multiple antigen peptide (MAP) composed of two distinct protective antigens derived from the parasite Schistosoma mansoni (Ferru et al. (1997) Parasite Immunol. 19: 1-11); Leishmania parasite surface molecules (Lezama-Davila (1997) Arch. Med. Res. 28: 47-53); third-stage larval (L3) antigens of L. loa (Akue at al. (1997) J. Infect. Dis. 175: 158-63); the genes, Tams1-1 and Tams1-2, encoding the 30-and 32-kDa major merozoite surface antigens of Theileria annulata (Ta) (d'Oliveira et al. (1996) Gene 172: 33-39); Plasmodium falciparum merozoite surface antigen 1 or 2 (al-Yaman et al. (1995) Trans. R. Soc. Trop. Med. Hyg. 89: 555-559; Beck et al. (1997) J. Infect. Dis. 175: 921-926; Rzepczyk et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 1098-1100); circumsporozoite (CS) protein-based B-epitopes from Plasmodium berghei , (PPPPNPND) 2 (SEQ ID NO: 23) and Plasmodium yoelii , (QGPGAP) 3 QG (SEQ ID NO: 24), along with a P. berghei T-helper epitope KQIRDSITEEWS (SEQ ID NO: 25) (Reed et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 482-488); NYVAC-Pf7 encoded Plasmodium falciparum antigens derived from the sporozoite (circumsporozoite protein and sporozoite surface protein 2), liver (liver stage antigen 1), blood (merozoite surface protein 1, serine repeat antigen, and apical membrane antigen 1), and sexual (25-kDa sexual-stage antigen) stages of the parasite life cycle were inserted into a single NYVAC genome to generate NYVAC-Pf7 (Tine et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 3833-3844); Plasmodium falciparum antigen Pfs230 (Williamson et al. (1996) Mol. Biochem. Parasitol. 78: 161-169); Plasmodium falciparum apical membrane antigen (AMA-1) (Lal et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 1054-1059); Plasmodium falciparum proteins Pfs 28 and Pfs25 (Duffy and Kaslow (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 1109-1113); Plasmodium falciparum merozoite surface protein, MSP1 (Hui et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 1502-1509); the malaria antigen Pf332 (Ahlborg et al. (1996) Immunology 88: 630-635); Plasmodium falciparum erythrocyte membrane protein 1 (Baruch et al. (1995) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 3497-3502; Baruch et al. (1995) Cell 82: 77-87); Plasmodium falciparum merozoite surface antigen, PfMSP-1 (Egan et al. (1996) J. Infect. Dis. 173: 765-769); Plasmodium falciparum antigens SERA, EBA-175, RAP1 and RAP2 (Riley (1997) J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 49: 21-27); Schistosoma japonicum paramyosin (Sj97) or fragments thereof (Yang et al. (1995) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 212: 1029-1039); and Hsp70 in parasites (Maresca and Kobayashi (1994) Experientia 50: 1067-1074).

4. Allergy

The invention also provides methods of obtaining reagents that are useful for treating allergy. In one embodiment, the methods involve making a library of recombinant polynucleotides that encode an allergen, and screening the library to identify those recombinant polynucleotides that exhibit improved properties when used as immunotherapeutic reagents for treating allergy. For example, specific immunotherapy of allergy using natural antigens carries a risk of inducing anaphylaxis, which can be initiated by cross-linking of high-affinity IgE receptors on mast cells. Therefore, allergens that are not recognized by pre-existing IgE are desirable. The methods of the invention provide methods by which one can obtain such allergen variants. Another improved property of interest is induction of broader immune responses, increased safety and efficacy.

Synthesis of polyclonal and allergen-specific IgE requires multiple interactions between B cells, T cells and professional antigen-presenting cells (APC). Activation of naive, unprimed B cells is initiated when specific B cells recognize the allergen by cell surface immunoglobulin (sIg). However, costimulatory molecules expressed by activated T cells in both soluble and membrane-bound forms are necessary for differentiation of B cells into IgE-secreting plasma cells. Activation of T helper cells requires recognition of an antigenic peptide in the context of MHC class II molecules on the plasma membrane of APC, such as monocytes, dendritic cells, Langerhans cells or primed B cells. Professional APC can efficiently capture the antigen and the peptide-MHC class II complexes are formed in a post-Golgi, proteolytic intracellular compartment and subsequently exported to the plasma membrane, where they are recognized by T cell receptor (TCR) (Whitton (1998) Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol. 232: 1-13). In addition, activated B cells express CD80 (B7-1) and CD86 (B7-2, B70), which are the counter receptors for CD28 and which provide a costimulatory signal for T cell activation resulting in T cell proliferation and cytokine synthesis. Since allergen-specific T cells from atopic individuals generally belong to the T H 2 cell subset, activation of these cells also leads to production of IL-4 and IL-13, which, together with membrane-bound costimulatory molecules expressed by activated T helper cells, direct B cell differentiation into IgE-secreting plasma cells.

Mast cells and eosinophils are key cells in inducing allergic symptoms in target organs. Recognition of specific antigen by IgE bound to high-affinity IgE receptors on mast cells, basophils or eosinophils results in crosslinking of the receptors leading to degranulation of the cells and rapid release of mediator molecules, such as histamine, prostaglandins and leukotrienes, causing allergic symptoms.

Immunotherapy of allergic diseases currently includes hyposensibilization treatments using increasing doses of allergen injected to the patient. These treatments result skewing of immune responses towards T H 1 phenotype and increase the ratio of IgG/IgE antibodies specific for allergens. Because these patients have circulating IgE antibodies specific for the allergens, these treatments include significant risk of anaphylactic reactions. In these reactions, free circulating allergen is recognized by IgE molecules bound to high-affinity IgE receptors on mast cells and eosinophils. Recognition of the allergen results in crosslinking of the receptors leading to release of mediators, such as histamine, prostaglandins, and leukotrienes, which cause the allergic symptoms, and occasionally anaphylactic reactions. Other problems associated with hyposensibilization include low efficacy and difficulties in producing allergen extracts reproducibly.

The methods of the invention provide a means to obtain allergens that, when used in genetic vaccines, provide a means of circumventing the problems that have limited the usefulness of previously known hyposensibilization treatments. For example, by expressing antigens on the surface of cells, such as muscle cells, the risk of anaphylactic reactions is significantly reduced. This can be conveniently achieved by using genetic vaccine vectors that encode transmembrane forms of allergens. The allergens can also be modified in such a way that they are efficiently expressed in transmembrane forms, further reducing the risk of anaphylactic reactions. Another advantage provided by the use of genetic vaccines for hyposensibilization is that the genetic vaccines can include cytokines and accessory molecules which further direct the immune responses towards the T H 1 phenotype, thus reducing the amount of IgE antibodies produced and increasing the efficacy of the treatments. To further reduce IgE production, one can administer the shuffled allergens using vectors that have been evolved to induce primarily IgG and IgM responses, with little or no IgE response (see, e.g., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/021,769, filed Feb. 11, 1998).

In these methods, polynucleotides encoding known allergens, or homologs or fragments thereof (e.g., immunogenic peptides) are inserted into DNA vaccine vectors and used to immunize allergic and asthmatic individuals. Alternatively, the shuffled allergens are expressed in manufacturing cells, such as E. coli or yeast cells, and subsequently purified and used to treat the patients or prevent allergic diseases. DNA shuffling or other recombination method can be used to obtain allergens that activate T cells but cannot induce anaphylactic reactions. For example, a library of recombinant polynucleotides that encode allergen variants can be expressed in cells, such as antigen presenting cells, which are than contacted with PBMC or T cell clones from atopic patients. Those library members that efficiently activate T H cells from the atopic patients can be identified by assaying for T cell proliferation, or by cytokine synthesis (e.g., synthesis of IL-2, IL-4, IFN-γ. Those recombinant allergen variants that are positive in the in vitro tests can then be subjected to in vivo testing.

Examples of allergies that can be treated include, but are not limited to, allergies against house dust mite, grass pollen, birch pollen, ragweed pollen, hazel pollen, cockroach, rice, olive tree pollen, fungi, mustard, bee venom. Antigens of interest include those of animals, including the mite (e.g., Dermatophagoides pteronyssinus, Dermatophagoides farinae, Blomia tropicalis ), such as the allergens der p1 (Scobie et al. (1994) Biochem. Soc. Trans. 22: 448S; Yssel et al. (1992) J. Immunol 148: 738-745), der p2 (Chua et al. (1996) Clin. Exp. Allergy 26: 829-837), der p3 (Smith and Thomas (1996) Clin. Exp. Allergy 26: 571-579), der p5, der p V (Lin et al. (1994) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 94: 989-996), der p6 (Bennett and Thomas (1996) Clin. Exp. Allergy 26: 1150-1154), der p 7 (Shen et al. (1995) Clin. Exp. Allergy 25: 416-422), der f2 (Yuuki et al. (1997) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 112: 44-48), der f3 (Nishiyama et al. (1995) FEBS Lett. 377: 62-66), der f7 (Shen et al. (1995) Clin. Exp. Allergy 25: 1000-1006); Mag 3 (Fujikawa et al. (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33: 311-319). Also of interest as antigens are the house dust mite allergens Tyr p2 (Eriksson et al. (1998) Eur. J. Biochem. 251: 443-447), Lep d1 (Schmidt et al. (1995) FEBS Lett. 370: 11-14), and glutathione S-transferase (O'Neill et al. (1995) Immunol. Lett. 48: 103-107); the 25,589 Da, 219 amino acid polypeptide with homology with glutathione S-transferases (O'Neill et al. (1994) Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 1219: 521-528); Blo t 5 (Arruda et al. (1995) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 107: 456-457); bee venom phospholipase A2 (Carballido et al. (1994) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 93: 758-767; Jutel et al. (1995) J. Immunol. 154: 4187-4194); bovine dermal/dander antigens BDA 11 (Rautiainen et al. (1995) J. Invest. Dermatol. 105: 660-663) and BDA20 (Mantyjarvi et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 97: 1297-1303); the major horse allergen Equ c1 (Gregoire et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 32951-32959); Jumper ant. M. pilosula allergen Myr p I and its homologous allergenic polypeptides Myr p2 (Donovan et al. (1996) Biochem. Mol. Biol. Int. 39: 877-885); 1-13, 14, 16 kD allergens of the mite Blomia tropicalis (Caraballo et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 98: 573-579); the cockroach allergens Bla g Bd90K (Helm et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 98: 172-80) and Bla g 2 (Arruda et al. (1995) J. Biol. Chem. 270: 19563-19568); the cockroach Cr-PI allergens (Wu et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 17937-17943); fire ant venom allergen, Sol i 2 (Schmidt et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 98: 82-88); the insect Chironomus thummi major allergen Chi t 1-9 (Kipp et al. (1996) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 110: 348-353); dog allergen Can f 1 or cat allergen Fel d 1 (Ingram et al. (1995) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 96: 449-456); albumin, derived, for example, from horse, dog or cat (Goubran Botros et al. (1996) Immunology 88: 340-347); deer allergens with the molecular mass of 22 kD, 25 kD or 60 kD (Spitzauer et al. (1997) Clin. Exp. Allergy 27: 196-200); and the 20 kD major allergen of cow (Ylonen et al. (1994) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 93: 851-858).

Pollen and grass allergens are also useful in vaccines, particularly after optimization of the antigen by the methods of the invention. Such allergens include, for example, Hor v9 (Astwood and Hill (1996) Gene 182: 53-62, Lig v1 (Batanero et al. (1996) Clin. Exp. Allergy 26: 1401-1410); Lol p 1 (Muller et al. (1996) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 109: 352-355), Lol p II (Tamborini et al. (1995) Mol. Immunol. 32: 505-513), Lol pVA, Lol pVB (Ong et al. (1995) Mol. Immunol. 32: 295-302), Lol p 9 (Blaher et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 98: 124-132); Par J I (Costa et al. (1994) FEBS Lett. 341: 182-186; Sallusto et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 97: 627-637), Par j 2.0101 (Duro et al. (1996) FEBS Lett. 399: 295-298); Bet v1 (Faber et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 19243-19250), Bet v2 (Rihs et al. (1994) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 105: 190-194); Dac g3 (Guerin-Marchand et al. (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33: 797-806); Phl p 1 (Petersen et al. (1995) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 95: 987-994), Phl p 5 (Muller et al. (1996) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 109: 352-355), Phl p 6 (Petersen et al. (1995) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 108: 55-59); Cry j I (Sone et al. (1994) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 199: 619-625), Cry j II (Namba et al. (1994) FEBS Lett. 353: 124-128); Cor a 1 (Schenk et al. (1994) Eur. J. Biochem. 224: 717-722); cyn d1 (Smith et al. (1996) J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 98: 331-343), cyn d7 (Suphioglu et al. (1997) FEBS Lett. 402: 167-172); Pha a 1 and isoforms of Pha a 5 (Suphioglu and Singh (1995) Clin. Exp. Allergy 25: 853-865); Cha o 1 (Suzuki et al. (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33: 451-460); profilin derived, e.g., from timothy grass or birth pollen (Valenta et al. (1994) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 199: 106-118); P0149 (Wu et al. (1996) Plant Mol. Biol. 32: 1037-1042); Ory s1 (Xu et al. (1995) Gene 164: 255-259); and Amb a V and Amb t 5 (Kim et al. (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33: 837-880; Zhu et al. (1995) J. Immunol. 155: 5064-5073).

Vaccines against food allergens can also be developed using the methods of the invention. Suitable antigens for shuffling include, for example, profilin (Rihs et al. (1994) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 105: 190-194); rice allergenic cDNAs belonging to the alpha-amylase/trypsin inhibitor gene family (Alvarez et al. (1995) Biochim Biophys Acta 1251: 201-204); the main olive allergen, Ole e I (Lombardero et al. (1994) Clin Exp Allergy 24: 765-770); Sin a 1, the major allergen from mustard (Gonzalez De La Pena et al. (1996) Eur J Biochem. 237: 827-832); parvalbumin, the major allergen of salmon (Lindstrom et al. (1996) Scand. J. Immunol. 44: 335-344); apple allergens, such as the major allergen Mal d 1 (Vanek-Krebitz et al. (1995) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 214: 538-551); and peanut allergens, such as Ara h I (Burks et al. (1995) J. Clin. Invest. 96: 1715-1721).

The methods of the invention can also be used to develop recombinant antigens that are effective against allergies to fungi. Fungal allergens useful in these vaccines include, but are not limited to, the allergen, Cla h III, of Cladosporium herbarum (Zhang et al. (1995) J. Immunol. 154: 710-717); the allergen Psi c 2, a fungal cyclophilin, from the basidiomycete Psilocybe cubensis (Horner et al. (1995) Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 107: 298-300); hsp 70 cloned from a cDNA library of Cladosporium herbarum (Zhang et al. (1996) Clin Exp Allergy 26: 88-95); the 68 kD allergen of Penicillium notatum (Shen et al. (1995) Clin. Exp. Allergy 26: 350-356); aldehyde dehydrogenase (ALDH) (Achatz et al. (1995) Mol Immunol. 32: 213-227); enolase (Achatz et al. (1995) Mol. Immunol. 32: 213-227); YCP4 (Id.); acidic ribosomal protein P2 (Id.).

Other allergens that can be used in the methods of the invention include latex allergens, such as a major allergen (Hev b 5) from natural rubber latex (Akasawa et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 25389-25393; Slater et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 25394-25399).

The invention also provides a solution to another shortcoming of vaccination as a treatment for allergy and asthma. While genetic vaccination primarily induces CD8 + T cell responses, induction of allergen-specific IgE responses is dependent on CD4 + T cells and their help to B cells. T H 2-type cells are particularly efficient in inducing IgE synthesis because they secrete high levels of IL-4, IL-5 and IL-13, which direct Ig isotype switching to IgE synthesis. IL-5 also induces eosinophilia. The methods of the invention can be used to develop recombinant antigens that efficiently induce CD4 + T cell responses, and direct differentiation of these cells towards the T H 1 phenotype.

5. Inflammatory and Autoimmune Diseases

Autoimmune diseases are characterized by immune response that attacks tissues or cells of ones own body, or pathogen-specific immune responses that also are harmful for ones own tissues or cells, or non-specific immune activation which is harmful for ones own tissues or cells. Examples of autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, rheumatoid arthritis, SLE, diabetes mellitus, myasthenia gravis, reactive arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and multiple sclerosis. These and other inflammatory conditions, including IBD, psoriasis, pancreatitis, and various immunodeficiencies, can be treated using antigens that are optimized using the methods of the invention.

These conditions are often characterized by an accumulation of inflammatory cells, such as lymphocytes, macrophages, and neutrophils, at the sites of inflammation. Altered cytokine production levels are often observed, with increased levels of cytokine production. Several autoimmune diseases, including diabetes and rheumatoid arthritis, are linked to certain MHC haplotypes. Other autoimmune-type disorders, such as reactive arthritis, have been shown to be triggered by bacteria such as Yersinia and Shigella, and evidence suggests that several other autoimmune diseases, such as diabetes, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, may also be initiated by viral or bacterial infections in genetically susceptible individuals.

Current strategies of treatment generally include anti-inflammatory drugs, such as NSAID or cyclosporin, and antiproliferative drugs, such as methotrexate. These therapies are non-specific, so a need exists for therapies having greater specificity, and for means to direct the immune responses towards the direction that inhibits the autoimmune process.

The present invention provides several strategies by which these needs can be fulfilled. First, the invention provides methods of obtaining antigens having greater tolerogenicity and/or have improved antigenicity. In a preferred embodiment, the antigens prepared according to the invention exhibit improved induction of tolerance by oral delivery. Oral tolerance is characterized by induction of immunological tolerance after oral administration of large quantities of antigen. In animal models, this approach has proven to be a very promising approach to treat autoimmune diseases, and clinical trials are in progress to address the efficacy of this approach in the treatment of human autoimmune diseases, such as rheumatoid arthritis and multiple sclerosis. It has also been suggested that induction of oral tolerance against viruses used in gene therapy might reduce the immunogenicity of gene therapy vectors. However, the amounts of antigen required for induction of oral tolerance are very high and the methods of the invention provide a means for obtaining antigens that exhibit a significant improvement in induction of oral tolerance.

Expression library immunization (Barry et al. (1995) Nature 377: 632) is a particularly useful method of screening for optimal antigens for use in genetic vaccines. For example, to identify autoantigens present in Yersinia, Shigella, and the like, one can screen for induction of T cells responses in HLA-B27 positive individuals. Complexes that include epitopes of bacterial antigens and MHC molecules associated with autoimmune diseases, e.g., HLA-B27 in association with Yersinia antigens can be used in the prevention of reactive arthritis and ankylosing spondylitis in HLA-B27 positive individuals.

Screening of optimized antigens can be done in animal models which are known to those of skill in the art. Examples of suitable models for various conditions include collagen induced arthritis, the NFS/sld mouse model of human Sjogren's syndrome; a 120 kD organ-specific autoantigen recently identified as an analog of human cytoskeletal protein (α-fodrin (Haneji et al. (1997) Science 276: 604), the New Zealand Black/White F1 hybrid mouse model of human SLE, NOD mice, a mouse model of human diabetes mellitus, fas/fas ligand mutant mice, which spontaneously develop autoimmune and lymphoproliferative disorders (Watanabe-Fukunaga et al. (1992) Nature 356: 314), and experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE), in which myelin basic protein induces a disease that resembles human multiple sclerosis.

Autoantigens that can be shuffled according to the methods of the invention and used in vaccines for treating multiple sclerosis include, but are not limited to, myelin basic protein (Stinissen et al. (1996) J. Neurosci. Res. 45: 500-511) or a fusion protein of myelin basic protein and proteolipid protein (Elliott et al. (1996) J. Clin. Invest. 98: 1602-1612), proteolipid protein (PLP) (Rosener et al. (1997) J. Neuroimmunol. 75: 28-34), 2′,3′-cyclic nucleotide 3′-phosphodiesterase (CNPase) (Rosener et al. (1997) J. Neuroimmunol. 75: 28-34), the Epstein Barr virus nuclear antigen-1 (EBNA-1) (Vaughan et al. (1996) J. Neuroimmunol. 69: 95-102), HSP70 (Salvetti et al. (1996) J. Neuroimmunol. 65: 143-53; Feldmann et al. (1996) Cell 85: 307).

Target antigens that, after shuffling according to the methods of the invention, can be used to treat scleroderma, systemic sclerosis, and systemic lupus erythematosus include, for example, (-2-GPI, 50 kDa glycoprotein (Blank et al. (1994) J. Autoimmun. 7: 441-455), Ku (p70/p80) autoantigen, or its 80-kd subunit protein (Hong et al. (1994) Invest. Ophthalmol. Vis. Sci. 35: 4023-4030; Wang et al. (1994) J. Cell Sci. 107: 3223-3233), the nuclear autoantigens La (SS-B) and Ro (SS-A) (Huang et al. (1997) J. Clin. Immunol. 17: 212-219; Igarashi et al. (1995) Autoimmunity 22: 33-42; Keech et al. (1996) Clin. Exp. Immunol. 104: 255-263; Manoussakis et al. (1995) J. Autoimmun. 8: 959-969; Topfer et al. (1995) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 92: 875-879), proteasome (-type subunit C9 (Feist et al. (1996) J. Exp. Med. 184: 1313-1318), Scleroderma antigens Rpp 30, Rpp 38 or Scl-70 (Eder et al. (1997) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 1101-1106; Hietarinta et al. (1994) Br. J. Rheumatol. 33: 323-326), the centrosome autoantigen PCM-1 (Bao et al. (1995) Autoimmunity 22: 219-228), polymyositis-scleroderma autoantigen (PM-Scl) (Kho et al. (1997) J. Biol. Chem. 272: 13426-13431), scleroderma (and other systemic autoimmune disease) autoantigen CENP-A (Muro et al. (1996) Clin. Immunol. Immunopathol. 78: 86-89), U5, a small nuclear ribonucleoprotein (snRNP) (Okano et al. (1996) Clin. Immunol. Immunopathol. 81: 41-47), the 100-kd protein of PM-Scl autoantigen (Ge et al. (1996) Arthritis Rheum. 39: 1588-1595), the nucleolar U3- and Th(7-2) ribonucleoproteins (Verheijen et al. (1994) J. Immunol. Methods 169: 173-182), the ribosomal protein L7 (Neu et al. (1995) Clin. Exp. Immunol. 100: 198-204), hPop1 (Lygerou et al. (1996) EMBO J. 15: 5936-5948), and a 36-kd protein from nuclear matrix antigen (Deng et al. (1996) Arthritis Rheum. 39: 1300-1307).

Hepatic autoimmune disorders can also be treated using improved recombinant antigens that are prepared according to the methods described herein. Among the antigens that are useful in such treatments are the cytochromes P450 and UDP-glucuronosyl-transferases (Obermayer-Straub and Manns (1996) Baillieres Clin. Gastroenterol. 10: 501-532), the cytochromes P450 2C9 and P450 1A2 (Bourdi et al. (1996) Chem. Res. Toxicol. 9: 1159-1166; Clemente et al. (1997) J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 82: 1353-1361), LC-1 antigen (Klein et al. (1996) J. Pediatr. Gastoenterol. Nutr. 23: 461-465), and a 230-kDa Golgi-associated protein (Funaki et al. (1996) Cell Struct. Funct. 21: 63-72).

For treatment of autoimmune disorders of the skin, useful antigens include, but are not limited to, the 450 kD human epidermal autoantigen (Fujiwara et al. (1996) J. Invest. Dermatol. 106: 1125-1130), the 230 kD and 180 kD bullous pemphigoid antigens (Hashimoto (1995) Keio J. Med. 44: 115-123; Murakami et al. (1996) J. Dermatol. Sci. 13: 112-117), pemphigus foliaceus antigen (desmoglein 1), pemphigus vulgaris antigen (desmoglein 3), BPAg2, BPAg1, and type VII collagen (Batteux et al. (1997) J. Clin. Immunol. 17: 228-233; Hashimoto et al. (1996) J. Dermatol. Sci. 12: 10-17), a 168-kDa mucosal antigen in a subset of patients with cicatricial pemphigoid (Ghohestani et al. (1996) J. Invest. Dermatol. 107: 136-139), and a 218-kd nuclear protein (218-kd Mi-2) (Seelig et al. (1995) Arthritis Rheum. 38: 1389-1399).

The methods of the invention are also useful for obtaining improved antigens for treating insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, using one or more of antigens which include, but are not limited to, insulin, proinsulin, GAD65 and GAD67, heat-shock protein 65 (hsp65), and islet-cell antigen 69 (ICA69) (French et al. (1997) Diabetes 46: 34-39; Roep (1996) Diabetes 45: 1147-1156; Schloot et al. (1997) Diabetologia 40: 332-338), viral proteins homologous to GAD65 (Jones and Crosby (1996) Diabetologia 39: 1318-1324), islet cell antigen-related protein-tyrosine phosphatase (PTP) (Cui et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 24817-24823), GM2-1 ganglioside (Cavallo et al. (1996) J. Endocrinol. 150: 113-120; Dotta et al. (1996) Diabetes 45: 1193-1196), glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD) (Nepom (1995) Curr. Opin. Immunol. 7: 825-830; Panina-Bordignon et al. (1995) J. Exp. Med. 181: 1923-1927), an islet cell antigen (ICA69) (Karges et al. (1997) Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1360: 97-101); Roep et al. (1996) Eur. J. Immunol. 26: 1285-1289), Tep69, the single T cell epitope recognized by T cells from diabetes patients (Karges et al. (1997) Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1370: 97-101), ICA 512, an autoantigen of type I diabetes (Solimena et al. (1996) EMBO J. 15: 2102-2114), an islet-cell protein tyrosine phosphatase and the 37-kDa autoantigen derived from it in type 1 diabetes (including IA-2, IA-2) (La Gasse et al. (1997) Mol. Med. 3: 163-173), the 64 kDa protein from In-111 cells or human thyroid follicular cells that is immunoprecipitated with sera from patients with islet cell surface antibodies (ICSA) (Igawa et al. (1996) Endocr. J. 43: 299-306), phogrin, a homologue of the human transmembrane protein tyrosine phosphatase, an autoantigen of type 1 diabetes (Kawasaki et al. (1996) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 227: 440-447), the 40 kDa and 37 kDa tryptic fragments and their precursors IA-2 and IA-2 in IDDM (Lampasona et al. (1996) J. Immunol. 157: 2707-2711; Notkins et al. (1996) J. Autoimmun. 9: 677-682), insulin or a cholera toxoid-insulin conjugate (Bergerot et al. (1997) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 4610-4614), carboxypeptidase H, the human homologue of gp330, which is a renal epithelial glycoprotein involved in inducing Heymann nephritis in rats, and the 38-kD islet mitochondrial autoantigen (Arden et al. (1996) J. Clin. Invest. 97: 551-561.

Rheumatoid arthritis is another condition that is treatable using optimized antigens prepared according to the present invention. Useful antigens for rheumatoid arthritis treatment include, but are not limited to, the 45 kDa DEK nuclear antigen, in particular onset juvenile rheumatoid arthritis and iridocyclitis (Murray et al. (1997) J. Rheumatol. 24: 560-567), human cartilage glycoprotein-39, an autoantigen in rheumatoid arthritis (Verheijden et al. (1997) Arthritis Rheum. 40: 1115-1125), a 68 k autoantigen in rheumatoid arthritis (Blass et al. (1997) Ann. Rheum. Dis. 56: 317-322), collagen (Rosloniec et al. (1995) J. Immunol. 155: 4504-4511), collagen type II (Cook et al. (1996) Arthritis Rheum. 39: 1720-1727; Trentham (1996) Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 778: 306-314), cartilage link protein (Guerassimov et al. (1997) J. Rheumatol. 24: 959-964), ezrin, radixin and moesin, which are auto-immune antigens in rheumatoid arthritis (Wagatsuma et al. (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33: 1171-1176), and mycobacterial heat shock protein 65 (Ragno et al. (1997) Arthritis Rheum. 40: 277-283).

Also among the conditions for which one can obtain an improved antigen suitable for treatment are autoimmune thyroid disorders. Antigens that are useful for these applications include, for example, thyroid peroxidase and the thyroid stimulating hormone receptor (Tandon and Weetman (1994) J. R. Coll. Physicians Lond. 28: 10-18), thyroid peroxidase from human Graves' thyroid tissue (Gardas et al. (1997) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 234: 366-370; Zimmer et al. (1997) Histochem. Cell. Biol. 107: 115-120), a 64-kDa antigen associated with thyroid-associated ophthalmopathy (Zhang et al. (1996) Clin. Immunol. Immunopathol. 80: 236-244), the human TSH receptor (Nicholson et al. (1996) J. Mol. Endocrinol. 16: 159-170), and the 64 kDa protein from In-111 cells or human thyroid follicular cells that is immunoprecipitated with sera from patients with islet cell surface antibodies (ICSA) (Igawa et al. (1996) Endocr. J. 43: 299-306).

Other conditions and associated antigens include, but are not limited to, Sjogren's syndrome (-fodrin; Haneji et al. (1997) Science 276: 604-607), myastenia gravis (the human M2 acetylcholine receptor or fragments thereof, specifically the second extracellular loop of the human M2 acetylcholine receptor; Fu et al. (1996) Clin. Immunol. Immunopathol. 78: 203-207), vitiligo (tyrosinase; Fishman et al. (1997) Cancer 79: 1461-1464), a 450 kD human epidermal autoantigen recognized by serum from individual with blistering skin disease, and ulcerative colitis (chromosomal proteins HMG1 and HMG2; Sobajima et al. (1997) Clin. Exp. Immunol. 107: 135-140).

6. Cancer

Immunotherapy has great promise for the treatment of cancer and prevention of metastasis. By inducing an immune response against cancerous cells, the body's immune system can be enlisted to reduce or eliminate cancer. Improved antigens obtained using the methods of the invention provide cancer immunotherapies of increased effectiveness compared to those that are presently available.

One approach to cancer immunotherapy is vaccination using vaccines that include or encode antigens that are specific for tumor cells or by injecting the patients with purified recombinant cancer antigens. The methods of the invention can used for obtaining antigens that exhibit an enhancement of immune responses against known tumor-specific antigens, and also to search for novel protective antigenic sequences. Antigens having optimized expression, processing, and presentation can be obtained as described herein. The approach used for each particular cancer can vary. For treatment of hormone-sensitive cancers (for example, breast cancer and prostate cancer), methods of the invention can be used to obtain optimized hormone antagonists. For highly immunogenic tumors, including melanoma, one can screen for recombinant antigens that optimally boost the immune response against the tumor. Breast cancer, in contrast, is of relatively low immunogenicity and exhibits slow progression, so individual treatments can be designed for each patient. Prevention of metastasis is also a goal in design of cancer vaccines.

Among the tumor-specific antigens that can be used in the antigen shuffling methods of the invention are: bullous pemphigoid antigen 2, prostate mucin antigen (PMA) (Beckett and Wright (1995) Int. J. cancer 62: 703-710), tumor associated Thomsen-Friedenreich antigen (Dahlenborg et al. (1997) Int. J. Cancer 70: 63-71), prostate-specific antigen (PSA) (Dannull and Belldegrun (1997) Br. J. Urol. 1: 97-103), luminal epithelial antigen (LEA.135) of breast carcinoma and bladder transitional cell carcinoma (TCC) (Jones et al. (1997) Anticancer Res. 17: 685-687), cancer-associated serum antigen (CASA) and cancer antigen 125 (CA 125) (Kierkegaard et al. (1995) Gynecol. Oncol. 59: 251-254), the epithelial glycoprotein 40 (EGP40) (Kievit et al. (1997) Int. J. Cancer 71: 237-245), squamous cell carcinoma antigen (SCC) (Lozza et al. (1997) Anticancer Res. 17: 525-529), cathepsin E (Mota et al. (1997) Am. J. Pathol. 150: 1223-1229), tyrosinase in melanoma (Fishman et al. (1997) Cancer 79: 1461-1464), cell nuclear antigen (PCNA) of cerebral cavernomas (Notelet et al. (1997) Surg. Neurol. 47: 364-370), DF3/MUC1 breast cancer antigen (Apostolopoulos et al. (1996) Immunol. Cell. Biol. 74: 457-464; Pandey et al. (1995) Cancer Res. 55: 4000-4003), carcinoembryonic antigen (Paone et al. (1996) J. Cancer Res. Clin. Oncol. 122: 499-503; Schlom et al. (1996) Breast Cancer Res. Treat. 38: 27-39), tumor-associated antigen CA 19-9 (Tolliver and O'Brien (1997) South Med. J. 90: 89-90; Tsuruta et al. (1997) Urol. Int. 58: 20-24), human melanoma antigens MART-1/Melan-A27-35 and gp100 (Kawakami and Rosenberg (1997) Int. Rev. Immunol. 14: 173-192; Zajac et al. (1997) Int. J. Cancer 71: 491-496), the T and Tn pancarcinoma (CA) glycopeptide epitopes (Springer (1995) Crit. Rev. Oncog. 6: 57-85), a 35 kD tumor-associated autoantigen in papillary thyroid carcinoma (Lucas et al. (1996) Anticancer Res. 16: 2493-2496), KH-1 adenocarcinoma antigen (Deshpande and Danishefsky (1997) Nature 387: 164-166), the A60 mycobacterial antigen (Maes et al. (1996) J. Cancer Res. Clin. Oncol. 122: 296-300), heat shock proteins (HSPs) (Blachere and Srivastava (1995) Semin. Cancer Biol. 6: 349-355), and MAGE, tyrosinase, melan-A and gp75 and mutant oncogene products (e.g., p53, ras, and HER-2/neu (Bueler and Mulligan (1996) Mol. Med. 2: 545-555; Lewis and Houghton (1995) Semi. Cancer Biol. 6: 321-327; Theobald et al. (1995) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 92: 11993-11997).

7. Contraception

Genetic vaccines that contain optimized antigens obtained by the methods of the invention are also useful for contraception. For example, genetic vaccines can be obtained that encode sperm cell specific antigens, and thus induce anti-sperm immune responses. Vaccination can be achieved by, for example, administration of recombinant bacterial strains, e.g., Salmonella and the like, which express sperm antigen, as well as by induction of neutralizing anti-hCG antibodies by vaccination by DNA vaccines encoding human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), or a fragment thereof.

Sperm antigens which can be used in the genetic vaccines include, for example, lactate dehydrogenase (LDH-C4), galactosyltransferase (GT), SP-10, rabbit sperm autoantigen (RSA), guinea pig (g)PH-20, cleavage signal protein (CS-1), HSA-63, human (h)PH-20, and AgX-1 (Zhu and Naz (1994) Arch. Androl. 33: 141-144), the synthetic sperm peptide, P10G (O'Rand et al. (1993) J. Reprod. Immunol. 25: 89-102), the 135 kD, 95 kD, 65 kD, 47 kD, 41 kD and 23 kD proteins of sperm, and the FA-1 antigen (Naz et al. (1995) Arch. Androl. 35: 225-231), and the 35 kD fragment of cytokeratin 1 (Lucas et al. (1996) Anticancer Res. 16: 2493-2496).

The methods of the invention can also be used to obtain genetic vaccines that are expressed specifically in testis. For example, polynucleotide sequences that direct expression of genes that are specific to testis can be used (e.g., fertilization antigen-1 and the like). In addition to sperm antigens, antigens expressed on oocytes or hormones regulating reproduction may be useful targets of contraceptive vaccines. For example, genetic vaccines can be used to generate antibodies against gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH) or zona pellucida proteins (Miller et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 1858-1862). Vaccinations using these molecules have been shown to be efficacious in animal models (Miller et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 1858-1862). Another example of a useful component of a genetic contraceptive vaccine is the ovarian zona pellucida glycoprotein ZP3 (Tung et al. (1994) Reprod. Fertil. Dev. 6: 349-355).

Methods of Selecting and Identifying Optimized Recombinant Antigens

Once one has performed DNA shuffling to obtain a library of polynucleotides that encode recombinant antigens, the library is subjected to selection and/or screening to identify those library members that encode antigenic peptides that have improved ability to induce an immune response to the pathogenic agent. Selection and screening of recombinant polynucleotides that encode polypeptides having an improved ability to induce an immune response can involve either in vivo and in vitro methods, but most often involves a combination of these methods. For example, in a typical embodiment the members of a library of recombinant nucleic acids are picked, either individually or as pools. The clones can be subjected to analysis directly, or can be expressed to produce the corresponding polypeptides. In a presently preferred embodiment, an in vitro screen is performed to identify the best candidate sequences for the in vivo studies. Alternatively, the library can be subjected in vivo challenge studies directly. The analyses can employ either the nucleic acids themselves (e.g., as genetic vaccines), or the polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acids. A schematic diagram of a typical strategy is shown in FIG. 5 . Both in vitro and in vivo methods are described in more detail below.

If a recombination cycle is performed in vitro, the products of recombination, i.e., recombinant segments, are sometimes introduced into cells before the screening step. Recombinant segments can also be linked to an appropriate vector or other regulatory sequences before screening. Alternatively, products of recombination generated in vitro are sometimes packaged in viruses (e.g., bacteriophage) before screening. If recombination is performed in vivo, recombination products can sometimes be screened in the cells in which recombination occurred. In other applications, recombinant segments are extracted from the cells, and optionally packaged as viruses, before screening.

Often, improvements are achieved after one round of recombination and selection. However, recursive sequence recombination can also be employed to achieve still further improvements in a desired property, or to bring about new (or “distinct”) properties. Recursive sequence recombination entails successive cycles of recombination to generate molecular diversity. That is, one creates a family of nucleic acid molecules showing some sequence identify to each other but differing in the presence of mutations. In any given cycle, recombination can occur in vivo or in vitro, intracellularly or extracellularly. Furthermore, diversity resulting from recombination can be augmented in any cycle by applying prior methods of mutagenesis (e.g., error-prone PCR or cassette mutagenesis) to either the substrates or products for recombination.

In a presently preferred embodiment, polynucleotides that encode optimized recombinant antigens are subjected to molecular backcrossing, which provides a means to breed the shuffled chimeras/mutants back to a parental or wild-type sequence, while retaining the mutations that are critical to the phenotype that provides the optimized immune responses. In addition to removing the neutral mutations, molecular backcrossing can also be used to characterize which of the many mutations in an improved variant contribute most to the improved phenotype. This cannot be accomplished in an efficient library fashion by any other method. Backcrossing is performed by shuffling the improved sequence with a large molar excess of the parental sequences.

The nature of screening or selection depends on what property or characteristic is to be acquired or the property or characteristic for which improvement is sought, and many examples are discussed below. It is not usually necessary to understand the molecular basis by which particular products of recombination (recombinant segments) have acquired new or improved properties or characteristics relative to the starting substrates. For example, a gene that encodes an antigenic polypeptide can have many component sequences each having a different intended role (see, e.g., FIG. 4 ). Each of these component sequences can be varied and recombined simultaneously. Screening/selection can then be performed, for example, for recombinant segments that have increased ability to induce an immune response to a pathogenic agent without the need to attribute such improvement to any of the individual component sequences of the recombinant polynucleotide.

Depending on the particular screening protocol used for a desired property, initial round(s) of screening can sometimes be performed using bacterial cells due to high transfection efficiencies and ease of culture. However, especially for testing of immunogenic activity, test animals are used for library expression and screening. Similarly other types of screening which are not amenable to screening in bacterial or simple eukaryotic library cells, are performed in cells selected for use in an environment close to that of their intended use. Final rounds of screening can be performed in cells or organisms that are as close as possible to the precise cell type or organism of intended use.

If further improvement in a property is desired, at least one, and usually a collection, of recombinant segments surviving a first round of screening/selection are subject to a further round of recombination. These recombinant segments can be recombined with each other or with exogenous segments representing the original substrates or further variants thereof. Again, recombination can proceed in vitro or in vivo. If the previous screening step identifies desired recombinant segments as components of cells, the components can be subjected to further recombination in vivo, or can be subjected to further recombination in vitro, or can be isolated before performing a round of in vitro recombination. Conversely, if the previous screening step identifies desired recombinant segments in naked form or as components of viruses, these segments can be introduced into cells to perform a round of in vivo recombination. The second round of recombination, irrespective how performed, generates further recombinant segments which encompass additional diversity that is present in recombinant segments resulting from previous rounds.

The second round of recombination can be followed by a further round of screening/selection according to the principles discussed above for the first round. The stringency of screening/selection can be increased between rounds. Also, the nature of the screen and the property being screened for can vary between rounds if improvement in more than one property is desired or if acquiring more than one new property is desired. Additional rounds of recombination and screening can then be performed until the recombinant segments have sufficiently evolved to acquire the desired new or improved property or function.

The practice of this invention involves the construction of recombinant nucleic acids and the expression of genes in transfected host cells. Molecular cloning techniques to achieve these ends are known in the art. A wide variety of cloning and in vitro amplification methods suitable for the construction of recombinant nucleic acids such as expression vectors are well-known to persons of skill. General texts which describe molecular biological techniques useful herein, including mutagenesis, include Berger and Kimmel, Guide to Molecular Cloning Techniques, Methods in Enzymology volume 152 Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (Berger); Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning - A Laboratory Manual (2nd Ed.), Vol. 1-3, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989 (“Sambrook”) and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , F. M. Ausubel et al., eds, Current Protocols, a joint venture between Greene Publishing Associates, Inc. and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., (supplemented through 1998) (“Ausubel”)). Examples of techniques sufficient to direct persons of skill through in vitro amplification methods, including the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) the ligase chain reaction (LCR), Q-replicase amplification and other RNA polymerase mediated techniques (e.g., NASBA) are found in Berger, Sambrook, and Ausubel, as well as Mullis et al. (1987) U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202; PCR Protocols A Guide to Methods and Applications (Innis et al. eds) Academic Press Inc. San Diego, Calif. (1990) (Innis); Arnheim & Levinson (Oct. 1, 1990) C&EN 36-47 ; The Journal Of NIH Research (1991) 3, 81-94; (Kwoh et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86, 1173; Guatelli et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87, 1874; Lomell et al. (1989) J. Clin. Chem 35, 1826; Landegren et al. (1988) Science 241, 1077-1080; Van Brunt (1990) Biotechnology 8, 291-294; Wu and Wallace (1989) Gene 4, 560; Barringer et al. (1990) Gene 89, 117, and Sooknanan and Malek (1995) Biotechnology 13: 563-564. Improved methods of cloning in vitro amplified nucleic acids are described in Wallace et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,426,039. Improved methods of amplifying large nucleic acids by PCR are summarized in Cheng et al. (1994) Nature 369: 684-685 and the references therein, in which PCR amplicons of up to 40 kb are generated. One of skill will appreciate that essentially any RNA can be converted into a double stranded DNA suitable for restriction digestion, PCR expansion and sequencing using reverse transcriptase and a polymerase. See, Ausubel, Sambrook and Berger, all supra.

Oligonucleotides for use as probes, e.g., in in vitro amplification methods, for use as gene probes, or as shuffling targets (e.g., synthetic genes or gene segments) are typically synthesized chemically according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester methods described by Beaucage and Caruthers (1981) Tetrahedron Letts., 22(20): 1859-1862, e.g., using an automated synthesizer, as described in Needman-VanDevanter et al. (1984) Nucleic Acids Res., 12: 6159-6168. Oligonucleotides can also be custom made and ordered from a variety of commercial sources known to persons of skill.

Indeed, essentially an nucleic acid with a known sequence can be custom ordered from any of a variety of commercial sources, such as The Midland Certified Reagent Company (mcrc@oligos.com), The Great American Gene Company (http://www.genco.com), ExpressGen Inc. (www.expressgen.com), Operon Technologies Inc. (Alameda, Calif.) and many others. Similarly, peptides and antibodies can be custom ordered from any of a variety of sources, such as PeptidoGenic (pkim@ccnet.com), HTI Bio-products, Inc. (http://www.htibio.com), BMA Biomedicals Ltd (U.K.), Bio Synthesis, Inc., and many others.

1. Purification and in vitro analysis of recombinant nucleic acids and polypeptides

Once DNA shuffling has been performed, the resulting library of recombinant polynucleotides can be subjected to purification and preliminary analysis in vitro, in order to identify the most promising candidate recombinant nucleic acids. Advantageously, the assays can be practiced in a high-throughput format. For example, to purify individual shuffled recombinant antigens, clones can robotically picked into 96-well formats, grown, and, if desired, frozen for storage.

Whole cell lysates (V-antigen), periplasmic extracts, or culture supernatants (toxins) can be assayed directly by ELISA as described below, but high throughput purification is sometimes also needed. Affinity chromatography using immobilized antibodies or incorporation of a small nonimmunogenic affinity tag such as a hexahistidine peptide with immobilized metal affinity chromatography will allow rapid protein purification. High binding-capacity reagents with 96-well filter bottom plates provide a high throughput purification process. The scale of culture and purification will depend on protein yield, but initial studies will require less than 50 micrograms of protein. Antigens showing improved properties can be purified in larger scale by FPLC for re-assay and animal challenge studies.

In some embodiments, the shuffled antigen-encoding polynucleotides are assayed as genetic vaccines. Genetic vaccine vectors containing the shuffled antigen sequences can be prepared using robotic colony picking and subsequent robotic plasmid purification. Robotic plasmid purification protocols are available that allow purification of 600-800 plasmids per day. The quantity and purity of the DNA can also be analyzed in 96-well plates, for example. In a presently preferred embodiment, the amount of DNA in each sample is robotically normalized, which can significantly reduce the variation between different batches of vectors.

Once the proteins and/or nucleic acids are picked and purified as desired, they can be subjected to any of a number of in vitro analysis methods. Such screenings include, for example, phage display, flow cytometry, and ELISA assays to identify antigens that are efficiently expressed and have multiple epitopes and a proper folding pattern. In the case of bacterial toxins, the libraries may also be screened for reduced toxicity in mammalian cells.

As one example, to identify recombinant antigens that are cross-reactive, one can use a panel of monoclonal antibodies for screening. A humoral immune response generally targets multiple regions of antigenic proteins. Accordingly, monoclonal antibodies can be raised against various regions of immunogenic proteins (Alving et al. (1995) Immunol. Rev. 145: 5). In addition, there are several examples of monoclonal antibodies that only recognize one strain of a given pathogen, and by definition, different serotypes of pathogens are recognized by different sets of antibodies. For example, a panel of monoclonal antibodies have been raised against VEE envelope proteins, thus providing a means to recognize different subtypes of the virus (Roehrig and Bolin (1997) J. Clin. Microbiol. 35: 1887). Such antibodies, combined with phage display and ELISA screening, can be used to enrich recombinant antigens that have epitopes from multiple pathogen strains. Flow cytometry based cell sorting will further allow for the selection of variants that are most efficiently expressed.

Phage display provides a powerful method for selecting proteins of interest from large libraries (Bass et al. (1990) Proteins: Struct. Funct. Genet. 8: 309; Lowman and Wells (1991) Methods: A Companion to Methods Enz. 3(3);205-206. Lowman and Wells (1993) J. Mol. Biol. 234;564-578). Some recent reviews on the phage display technique include, for example, McGregor (1996) Mol Biotechnol. 6(2):155-62; Dunn (1996) Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 7(5):547-53; Hill et al. (1996) Mol Microbiol 20(4):685-92; Phage Display of Peptides and Proteins: A Laboratory Manual. B K. Kay, J. Winter, J, McCafferty eds., Academic Press 1996; O'Neil et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5(4):443-9; Phizicky et al. (1995) Microbiol Rev. 59(1):94-123; Clackson et al. (1994) Trends Biotechnol. 12(5):173-84; Felici et al. (1995) Biotechnol. Annu. Rev. 1:149-83; Burton (1995) Immunotechnology 1(2):87-94; ) See, also, Cwirla et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:6378-6382 (1990); Devlin et al., Science 249: 404-406 (1990), Scott & Smith, Science 249: 386-388 (1990); Ladner et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,698. Each phage particle displays a unique variant protein on its surface and packages the gene encoding that particular variant. The shuffled genes for the antigens are fused to a protein that is expressed on the phage surface, e.g., gene III of phage M13, and cloned into phagemid vectors. In a presently preferred embodiment, a suppressible stop codon (e.g., an amber stop codon) separates the genes so that in a suppressing strain of E. coli, the antigen-gIIIp fusion is produced and becomes incorporated into phage particles upon infection with M13 helper phage. The same vector can direct production of the unfused antigen alone in a nonsuppressing E. coli for protein purification.

The genetic packages most frequently used for display libraries are bacteriophage, particularly filamentous phage, and especially phage M13, Fd and F1. Most work has involved inserting libraries encoding polypeptides to be displayed into either gIII or gVIII of these phage forming a fusion protein. See, e.g., Dower, WO 91/19818; Devlin, WO 91/18989; MacCafferty, WO 92/01047 (gene III); Huse, WO 92/06204; Kang, WO 92/18619 (gene VIII). Such a fusion protein comprises a signal sequence, usually but not necessarily, from the phage coat protein, a polypeptide to be displayed and either the gene III or gene VIII protein or a fragment thereof. Exogenous coding sequences are often inserted at nor near the N-terminal or gene III or gene VIII although other insertion sites are possible.

Eukaryotic viruses can be used to display polypeptides in a analogous manner. For example, display of human heregulin fused to gp70 of Moloney murine leukemia virus has bee reported by Han et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92: 9747-9751 (1995). Spores can also be used as replicable genetic packages. In this case, polypeptides are displayed from the outer surface of the spore. For example, spores from B. subtilis have been reported to be suitable. Sequences of coat proteins of these spores are provided by Donovan et al., J. Mol. Biol. 196, 1-10 (1987). Cells can also be used as replicable genetic packages. Polypeptides to be displayed are inserted into a gene encoding a cell protein that is expressed on the cells surface. Bacterial cells including Salmonella typhimurium, Bacillus subtilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Vibrio cholerae, Klebsiella pneumonia, Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Neisseria meningitidis, Bacteroides nodosus, Moraxella bovis, and especially Escherichia coli are preferred. Details of outer surface proteins are discussed by Ladner et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,698 and references cited therein. For example, the lamB protein of E. coli is suitable.

A basic concept of display methods that use phage or other replicable genetic package is the establishment of a physical association between DNA encoding a polypeptide to be screened and the polypeptide. This physical association is provided by the replicable genetic package, which displays a polypeptide as part of a capsid enclosing the genome of the phage or other package, wherein the polypeptide is encoded by the genome. The establishment of a physical association between polypeptides and their genetic material allows simultaneous mass screening of very large numbers of phage bearing different polypeptides. Phage displaying a polypeptide with affinity to a target, e.g., a receptor, bind to the target and these phage are enriched by affinity screening to the target. The identity of polypeptides displayed from these phage can be determined from their respective genomes. Using these methods a polypeptide identified as having a binding affinity for a desired target can then be synthesized in bulk by conventional means, or the polynucleotide that encodes the peptide or polypeptide can be used as part of a genetic vaccine.

Variants with specific binding properties, in this case binding to family-specific antibodies, are easily enriched by panning with immobilized antibodies. Antibodies specific for a single family are used in each round of panning to rapidly select variants that have multiple epitopes from the antigen families. For example, A-family specific antibodies can be used to select those shuffled clones that display A-specific epitopes in the first round of panning. A second round of panning with B-specific antibodies will select from the “A” clones those that display both A- and B-specific epitopes. A third round of panning with C-specific antibodies will select for variants with A, B, and C epitopes. A continual selection exists during this process that express well in E. coli and that are stable throughout the selection. Improvements in factors such as transcription, translation, secretion, folding and stability are often observed and will enhance the utility of selected clones for use in vaccine production.

Phage ELISA methods can be used to rapidly characterize individual variants. These assays provide a rapid method for quantitation of variants without requiring purification of each protein. Individual clones are arrayed into 96-well plates, grown, and frozen for storage. Cells in duplicate plates are infected with helper phage, grown overnight and pelleted by centrifugation. The supernatants containing phage displaying particular variants are incubated with immobilized antibodies and bound clones are detected by anti-M13 antibody conjugates. Titration series of phage particles, immobilized antigen, and/or soluble antigen competition binding studies are all highly effective means to quantitate protein binding. Variant antigens displaying multiple epitopes will be further studied in appropriate animal challenge models.

Several groups have reported an in vitro ribosome display system for the screening and selection of mutant proteins with desired properties from large libraries. This technique can be used similarly to phage display to select or enrich for variant antigens with improved properties such as broad cross reactivity to antibodies and improved folding (see, e.g., Hanes et al. (1997) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci, USA 94(10):4937-42; Mattheakis et al. (1994) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 91(19):9022-6; He et al. (1997) Nucl. Acids Res. 25(24):5132-4; Nemoto et al. (1997) FEBS Lett. 414(2):405-8).

Other display methods exist to screen antigens for improved properties such as increased expression levels, broad cross reactivity, enhanced folding and stability. These include, but are not limited to display of proteins on intact E. coli or other cells (e.g., Francisco et al. (1993) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 90: 1044-10448; Lu et al. (1995) Bio/Technology 13: 366-372). Fusions of shuffled antigens to DNA-binding proteins can link the antigen protein to its gene in an expression vector (Schatz et al. (1996) Methods Enzymol. 267: 171-91; Gates et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol. 255: 373-86).

The various display methods and ELISA assays can be used to screen for shuffled antigens with improved properties such as presentation of multiple epitopes, improved immunogenicity, increased expression levels, increased folding rates and efficiency, increased stability to factors such as temperature, buffers, solvents, improved purification properties, etc. Selection of shuffled antigens with improved expression, folding, stability and purification profile under a variety of chromatographic conditions can be very important improvements to incorporate for the vaccine manufacturing process.

To identify recombinant antigenic polypeptides that exhibit improved expression in a host cell, flow cytometry is a useful technique. Flow cytometry provides a method to efficiently analyze the functional properties of millions of individual cells. One can analyze the expression levels of several genes simultaneously, and flow cytometry-based cell sorting allows for the selection of cells that display properly expressed antigen variants on the cell surface or in the cytoplasm. Very large numbers (>10 7 ) of cells can be evaluated in a single vial experiment, and the pool of the best individual sequences can be recovered from the sorted cells. These methods are particularly useful in the case of, for example, Hantaan virus glycoproteins, which are generally very poorly expressed in mammalian cells. This approach provides a general solution to improve expression levels in pathogen antigens in mammalian cells, a phenomenon that is critical for the function of genetic vaccines.

To use flow cytometry to analyze polypeptides that are not expressed on the cell surface, one can engineer the recombinant polynucleotides in the library such that the polynucleotide is expressed as a fusion protein that has a region of amino acids which is targeted to the cell membrane. For example, the region can encode a hydrophobic stretch of C-terminal amino acids which signals the attachment of a phosphoinositol-glycan (PIG) terminus on the expressed protein and directs the protein to be expressed on the surface of the transfected cell (Whitehorn et al. (1995) Biotechnology (N Y) 13:1215-9). With an antigen that is naturally a soluble protein, this method will likely not affect the three dimensional folding of the protein in this engineered fusion with a new C-terminus. With an antigen that is naturally a transmembrane protein (e.g., a surface membrane protein on pathogenic viruses, bacteria, protzoa or tumor cells) there are at least two possibilities. First, the extracellular domain can be engineered to be in fusion with the C-terminal sequence for signaling PIG-linkage. Second, the protein can be expressed in toto relying on the signalling of the host cell to direct it efficiently to the cell surface. In a minority of cases, the antigen for expression will have an endogenous PIG terminal linkage (e.g., some antigens of pathogenic protozoa).

Those cells expressing the antigen can be identified with a fluorescent monoclonal antibody specific for the C-terminal sequence on PIG-linked forms of the surface antigen. FACS analysis allows quantitative assessment of the level of expression of the correct form of the antigen on the cell population. Cells expressing the maximal level of antigen are sorted and standard molecular biology methods are used to recover the plasmid DNA vaccine vector that conferred this reactivity. An alternative procedure that allows purification of all those cells expressing the antigen (and that may be useful prior to loading onto a cell sorter since antigen expressing cells may be a very small minority population), is to rosette or pan-purify the cells expressing surface antigen. Rosettes can be formed between antigen expressing cells and erythrocytes bearing covalently coupled antibody to the relevant antigen. These are readily purified by unit gravity sedimentation. Panning of the cell population over petri dishes bearing immobilized monoclonal antibody specific for the relevant antigen can also be used to remove unwanted cells.

In the high throughput assays of the invention, it is possible to screen up to several thousand different shuffled variants in a single day. For example, each well of a microtiter plate can be used to run a separate assay, or, if concentration or incubation time effects are to be observed, every 5-10 wells can test a single variant. Thus, a single standard microtiter plate can assay about 100 (e.g., 96) reactions. If 1536 well plates are used, then a single plate can easily assay from about 100 to about 1500 different reactions. It is possible to assay several different plates per day; assay screens for up to about 6,000-20,000 different assays (i.e., involving different nucleic acids, encoded proteins, concentrations, etc.) is possible using the integrated systems of the invention. More recently, microfluidic approaches to reagent manipulation have been developed, e.g., by Caliper Technologies (Palo Alto, Calif.).

In one aspect, library members, e.g., cells, viral plaques, or the like, are separated on solid media to produce individual colonies (or plaques). Using an automated colony picker (e.g., the Q-bot, Genetix, U.K.), colonies or plaques are identified, picked, and up to 10,000 different mutants inoculated into 96 well microtiter dishes, optionally containing glass balls in the wells to prevent aggregation. The Q-bot does not pick an entire colony but rather inserts a pin through the center of the colony and exits with a small sampling of cells (or viruses in plaque applications). The time the pin is in the colony, the number of dips to inoculate the culture medium, and the time the pin is in that medium each effect inoculum size, and each can be controlled and optimized. The uniform process of the Q-bot decreases human handling error and increases the rate of establishing cultures (roughly 10,000/4 hours). These cultures are then shaken in a temperature and humidity controlled incubator. The glass balls in the microtiter plates act to promote uniform aeration of cells dispersal of cells, or the like, similar to the blades of a fermentor. Clones from cultures of interest can be cloned by limiting dilution. Plaques or cells constituting libraries can also be screened directly for production of proteins, either by detecting hybridization, protein activity, protein binding to antibodies, or the like.

The ability to detect a subtle increase in the performance of a shuffled library member over that of a parent strain relies on the sensitivity of the assay. The chance of finding the organisms having an improvement in ability to induce an immune response is increased by the number of individual mutants that can be screened by the assay. To increase the chances of identifying a pool of sufficient size, a prescreen that increases the number of mutants processed by 10-fold can be used. The goal of the prescreen will be to quickly identify mutants having equal or better product titers than the parent strain(s) and to move only these mutants forward to liquid cell culture for subsequent analysis.

A number of well known robotic systems have also been developed for solution phase chemistries useful in assay systems. These systems include automated workstations like the automated synthesis apparatus developed by Takeda Chemical Industries, LTD. (Osaka, Japan) and many robotic systems utilizing robotic arms (Zymate II, Zymark Corporation, Hopkinton, Mass.; Orca, Hewlett-Packard, Palo Alto, Calif.) which mimic the manual synthetic operations performed by a scientist. Any of the above devices are suitable for use with the present invention, e.g., for high-throughput screening of molecules encoded by codon-altered nucleic acids. The nature and implementation of modifications to these devices (if any) so that they can operate as discussed herein with reference to the integrated system will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art.

High throughput screening systems are commercially available (see, e.g., Zymark Corp., Hopkinton, Mass.; Air Technical Industries, Mentor, Ohio; Beckman Instruments, Inc. Fullerton, Calif.; Precision Systems, Inc., Natick, Mass., etc.). These systems typically automate entire procedures including all sample and reagent pipetting, liquid dispensing, timed incubations, and final readings of the microplate in detector(s) appropriate for the assay. These configurable systems provide high throughput and rapid start up as well as a high degree of flexibility and customization.

The manufacturers of such systems provide detailed protocols the various high throughput. Thus, for example, Zymark Corp. provides technical bulletins describing screening systems for detecting the modulation of gene transcription, ligand binding, and the like. Microfluidic approaches to reagent manipulation have also been developed, e.g., by Caliper Technologies (Palo Alto, Calif.).

Optical images viewed (and, optionally, recorded) by a camera or other recording device (e.g., a photodiode and data storage device) are optionally further processed in any of the embodiments herein, e.g., by digitizing the image and/or storing and analyzing the image on a computer. As noted above, in some applications, the signals resulting from assays are florescent, making optical detection approaches appropriate in these instances. A variety of commercially available peripheral equipment and software is available for digitizing, storing and analyzing a digitized video or digitized optical image, e.g., using PC (Intel x86 or Pentium chip-compatible DOS, OS2 WINDOWS, WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS95 based machines), MACINTOSH, or UNIX based (e.g., SUN work station) computers.

One conventional system carries light from the assay device to a cooled charge-coupled device (CCD) camera, in common use in the art. A CCD camera includes an array of picture elements (pixels). The light from the specimen is imaged on the CCD. Particular pixels corresponding to regions of the specimen (e.g., individual hybridization sites on an array of biological polymers) are sampled to obtain light intensity readings for each position. Multiple pixels are processed in parallel to increase speed. The apparatus and methods of the invention are easily used for viewing any sample, e.g., by fluorescent or dark field microscopic techniques.

Integrated systems for analysis in the present invention typically include a digital computer with high-throughput liquid control software, image analysis software, data interpretation software, a robotic liquid control armature for transferring solutions from a source to a destination operably linked to the digital computer, an input device (e.g., a computer keyboard) for entering data to the digital computer to control high throughput liquid transfer by the robotic liquid control armature and, optionally, an image scanner for digitizing label signals from labeled assay component. The image scanner interfaces with the image analysis software to provide a measurement of optical intensity. Typically, the intensity measurement is interpreted by the data interpretation software to show whether the optimized recombinant antigenic polypeptide products are produced.

2. Antigen Library Immunization

In a presently preferred embodiment, antigen library immunization (ALI) is used to identify optimized recombinant antigens that have improved immunogenicity. ALI involves introduction of the library of recombinant antigen-encoding nucleic acids, or the recombinant antigens encoded by the shuffled nucleic acids, into a test animal. The animals are then subjected to in vivo challenge using live pathogens. Neutralizing antibodies and cross-protective immune responses are studied after immunization with the entire libraries, pools and/or individual antigen variants.

Methods of immunizing test animals are well known to those of skill in the art. In presently preferred embodiments, test animals are immunized twice or three times at two week intervals. One week after the last immunization, the animals are challenged with live pathogens (or mixtures of pathogens), and the survival of symptoms of the animals is followed. Immunizations using test animal challenge are described in, for example, Roggenkamp et al. (1997) Infect. Immun. 65: 446; Woody et al. (1997) Vaccine 2: 133; Agren et al. (1997) J. Immunol. 158: 3936; Konishi et al. (1992) Virology 190: 454; Kinney et al. (1998) J. Virol. 62: 4697; Iacono-Connors et al. (1996) Virus Res. 43: 125; Kochel et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 547; and Chu et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69: 6417.

The immunizations can be performed by injecting either the recombinant polynucleotides themselves, i.e., as a genetic vaccine, or by immunizing the animals with polypeptides encoded by the recombinant polynucleotides. Bacterial antigens are typically screened primarily as recombinant proteins, whereas viral antigens are preferably analyzed using genetic vaccinations.

To dramatically reduce the number of experiments required to identify individual antigens having improved immunogenic properties, one can use pooling and deconvolution, as diagrammed in FIG. 6 . Pools of recombinant nucleic acids, or polypeptides encoded by the recombinant nucleic acids, are used to immunize test animals. Those pools that result in protection against pathogen challenge are then subdivided and subjected to additional analysis. The high throughput in vitro approaches described above can be used to identify the best candidate sequences for the in vivo studies.

The challenge models that can be used to screen for protective antigens include pathogen and toxin models, such as Yersinia bacteria, bacterial toxins (such as Staphylococcal and Streptococcal enterotoxins, E.coli/V. cholerae enterotoxins), Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (VEE), Flaviviruses (Japanese encephalitis virus, Tick-borne encephalitis virus, Dengue virus), Hantaan virus, Herpes simplex, influenza virus (e.g., Influenza A virus), Vesicular Stomatitis Virus, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Salmonella typhimurium, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Toxoplasma gondii, Plasmodium yoelii, Herpes simplex, influenza virus (e.g., Influenza A virus), and Vesicular Stomatitis Virus. However, the test animals can also be challenged with tumor cells to enable screening of antigens that efficiently protect against malignancies. Individual shuffled antigens or pools of antigens are introduced into the animals intradermally, intramuscularly, intravenously, intratracheally, anally, vaginally, orally, or intrapertioneally and antigens that can prevent the disease are chosen, when desired, for further rounds of shuffling and selection. Eventually, the most potent antigens, based on in vivo data in test animals and comparative in vitro studies in animals and man, are chosen for human trials, and their capacity to prevent and treat human diseases is investigated.

In some embodiments, antigen library immunization and pooling of individual clones is used to immunize against a pathogen strain that was not included in the sequences that were used to generate the library. However, homologous titer is always higher than heterologous titer. Pooling and deconvolution is especially efficient in models where minimal protection is provided by the wild-type antigens used as starting material for shuffling (for example minimal protection by antigens A and B against strain C in FIG. 3 B). This approach can be taken, for example, when evolving the V-antigen of Yersinae or Hantaan virus glycoproteins.

In some embodiments, the desired screening involves analysis of the immune response based on immunological assays known to those skilled in the art. Typically, the test animals are first immunized and blood or tissue samples are collected for example one to two weeks after the last immunization. These studies enable one to one can measure immune parameters that correlate to protective immunity, such as induction of specific antibodies (particularly IgG) and induction of specific T lymphocyte responses, in addition to determining whether an antigen or pools of antigens provides protective immunity. Spleen cells or peripheral blood mononuclear cells can be isolated from immunized test animals and measured for the presence of antigen-specific T cells and induction of cytokine synthesis. ELISA, ELISPOT and cytoplasmic cytokine staining, combined with flow cytometry, can provide such information on a single-cell level.

Common immunological tests that can be used to identify the efficacy of immunization include antibody measurements, neutralization assays and analysis of activation levels or frequencies of antigen presenting cells or lymphocytes that are specific for the antigen or pathogen. The test animals that can be used in such studies include, but are not limited to, mice, rats, guinea pigs, hamsters, rabbits, cats, dogs, pigs and monkeys. Monkey is a particularly useful test animal because the MHC molecules of monkeys are humans are very similar.

Virus neutralization assays are useful for detection of antibodies that not only specifically bind to the pathogen, but also neutralize the function of the virus. These assays are typically based on detection of antibodies in the sera of immunized animal and analysis of these antibodies for their capacity to inhibit viral growth in tissue culture cells. Such assays are known to those skilled in the art. One example of a virus neutralization assay is described by Dolin R. ( J. Infect. Dis. 1995, 172:1175-83). Virus neutralization assays provide means to screen for antigens that also provide protective immunity.

In some embodiments, shuffled antigens are screened for their capacity to induce T cell activation in vivo. More specifically, peripheral blood mononuclear cells or spleen cells from injected mice can be isolated and the capacity of cytotoxic T lymphocytes to lyse infected, autologous target cells is studied. The spleen cells can be reactivated with the specific antigen in vitro. In addition, T helper cell activation and differentiation is analyzed by measuring cell proliferation or production of T H 1 (IL-2 and IFN-γ) and T H 2 (IL-4 and IL-5) cytokines by ELISA and directly in CD4 + T cells by cytoplasmic cytokine staining and flow cytometry. Based on the cytokine production profile, one can also screen for alterations in the capacity of the antigens to direct T H 1T H 2 differentiation (as evidenced, for example, by changes in ratios of IL-4/(IFN-γ, IL-4/IL2, IL-5/IFN-γ, IL-5/IL-2, IL-13/IFN-γ, IL-13/IL-2). The analysis of the T cell activation induced by the antigen variants is a very useful screening method, because potent activation of specific T cells in vivo correlates to induction of protective immunity.

The frequency of antigen-specific CD8 + T cells in vivo can also be directly analyzed using tetramers of MHC class I molecules expressing specific peptides derived from the corresponding pathogen antigens (Ogg and McMichael, Curr. Opin. Immunol. 1998, 10:393-6; Altman et al., Science 1996, 274:94-6). The binding of the tetramers can be detected using flow cytometry, and will provide information about the efficacy of the shuffled antigens to induce activation of specific T cells. For example, flow cytometry and tetramer stainings provide an efficient method of identifying T cells that are specific to a given antigen or peptide. Another method involves panning using plates coated with tetramers with the specific peptides. This method allows large numbers of cells to be handled in a short time, but the method only selects for highest expression levels. The higher the frequency of antigen-specific T cells in vivo is, the more efficient the immunization has been, enabling identification of the antigen variants that have the most potent capacity to induce protective immune responses. These studies are particularly useful when conducted in monkeys, or other primates, because the MHC class I molecules of humans mimic those of other primates more closely than those of mice.

Measurement of the activation of antigen presenting cells (APC) in response to immunization by antigen variants is another useful screening method. Induction of APC activation can be detected based on changes in surface expression levels of activation antigens, such as B7-1 (CD80), B7-2) (CD86), MHC class I and II, CD14, CD23, and Fc receptors, and the like.

Shuffled cancer antigens that induce cytotoxic T cells that have the capacity to kill cancer cells can be identified by measuring the capacity of T cells derived from immunized animals to kill cancer cells in vitro. Typically the cancer cells are first labeled with radioactive isotopes and the release of radioactivity is an indication of tumor cell killing after incubation in the presence of T cells from immunized animals. Such cytotoxicity assays are known in the art.

An indication of the efficacy of an antigen to activate T cells specific for, for example, cancer antigens, allergens or autoantigens, is also the degree of skin inflammation when the antigen is injected into the skin of a patient or test animal. Strong inflammation is correlated with strong activation of antigenic-specific T cells. Improved activation of tumor-specific T cells may lead to enhanced killing of the tumors. In case of autoantigens, one can add immunomodulators that skew the responses towards T H 2, whereas in the case of allergens a T H 1 response is desired. Skin biopsies can be taken, enabling detailed studies of the type of immune response that occurs at the sites of each injection (in mice and monkeys large numbers of injections/antigens can be analyzed). Such studies include detection of changes in expression of cytokines, chemokines, accessory molecules, and the like, by cells upon injection of the antigen into the skin.

To screen for antigens that have optimal capacity to activate antigen-specific T cells, peripheral blood mononuclear cells from previously infected or immunized humans individuals can be used. This is a particularly useful method, because the MHC molecules that will present the antigenic peptides are human MHC molecules. Peripheral blood mononuclear cells or purified professional antigen-presenting cells (APCs) can be isolated from previously vaccinated or infected individuals or from patients with acute infection with the pathogen of interest. Because these individuals have increased frequencies of pathogen-specific T cells in circulation, antigens expressed in PBMCs or purified APCs of these individuals will induce proliferation and cytokine production by antigen-specific CD4 + and CD8 + T cells. Thus, antigens that simultaneously harbor epitopes from several antigens can be recognized by their capacity to stimulate T cells from various patients infected or immunized with different pathogen antigens, cancer antigens, autoantigens or allergens. One buffy coat derived from a blood donor contains lymphocytes from 0.5 liters of blood, and up to 10 4 PBMC can be obtained, enabling very large screening experiments using T cells from one donor.

When healthy vaccinated individuals (lab volunteers) are studied, one can make EBV-transformed B cell lines from these individuals. These cell lines can be used as antigen presenting cells in subsequent experiments using blood from the same donor; this reduces interassay and donor-to-donor variation. In addition, one can make antigen-specific T cell clones, after which antigen variants are introduced to EBV transformed B cells. The efficiency with which the transformed B cells induce proliferation of the specific T cell clones is then studied. When working with specific T cell clones, the proliferation and cytokine synthesis responses are significantly higher than when using total PBMCs, because the frequency of antigen-specific T cells among PBMC is very low.

CTL epitopes can be presented by most cells types since the class I major histocompatibility complex (MHC) surface glycoproteins are widely expressed. Therefore, transfection of cells in culture by libraries of shuffled antigen sequences in appropriate expression vectors can lead to class I epitope presentation. If specific CTLs directed to a given epitope have been isolated from an individual, then the co-culture of the transfected presenting cells and the CTLs can lead to release by the CTLs of cytokines, such as IL-2, IFN-γ, or TNF, if the epitope is presented. Higher amounts of released TNF will correspond to more efficient processing and presentation of the class I epitope from the shuffled, evolved sequence. Shuffled antigens that induce cytotoxic T cells that have the capacity to kill infected cells can also be identified by measuring the capacity of T cells derived from immunized animals to kill infected cells in vitro. Typically the target cells are first labeled with radioactive isotopes and the release of radioactivity is an indication of target cell killing after incubation in the presence of T cells from immunized animals. Such cytotoxicity assays are known in the art.

A second method for identifying optimized CTL epitopes does not require the isolation of CTLs reacting with the epitope. In this approach, cells expressing class I MHC surface glycoproteins are transfected with the library of evolved sequences as above. After suitable incubation to allow for processing and presentation, a detergent soluble extract is prepared from each cell culture and after a partial purification of the MHC-epitope complex (perhaps optional) the products are submitted to mass spectrometry (Henderson et al. (1993) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 90: 19275-10279). Since the sequence is known of the epitope whose presentation to be increased, one can calibrate the mass spectrogram to identify this peptide. In addition, a cellular protein can be used for internal calibration to obtain a quantitative result; the cellular protein used for internal calibration could be the MHC molecule itself. Thus one can measure the amount of peptide epitope bound as a proportion of the MHC molecules.

Use of Recombinant Multivalent Antigens

The multivalent antigens of the invention are useful for treating and/or preventing the various diseases and conditions with which the respective antigens are associated. For example, the multivalent antigens can be expressed in a suitable host cell and are administered in polypeptide form. Suitable formulations and dosage regimes for vaccine delivery are well known to those of skill in the art.

In presently preferred embodiments, the optimized recombinant polynucleotides that encode improved allergens are used in conjunction with a genetic vaccine vector. The choice of vector and components can also be optimized for the particular purpose of treating allergy, for example, or other conditions. For example, the polynucleotide that encodes the recombinant antigenic polypeptide can be placed under the control of a promoter, e.g., a high activity or tissue-specific promoter. The promoter used to express the antigenic polypeptide can itself be optimized using recombination and selection methods analogous to those described herein. The vector can contain immunostimulatory sequences such as are described in copending, commonly assigned U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/248,716, entitled “Optimization of Immunomodulatory Molecules,” filed as TTC Attorney Docket No. 18097-030300US on Feb. 10, 1999. A vector engineered to direct a T H 1 response is preferred for many of the immune responses mediated by the antigens described herein (see, e.g., copending, commonly assigned U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09,247,888, entitled “Genetic Vaccine Vector Engineering,” filed on Feb. 10, 1999 as TTC Attorney Docket No. 18087-030100U.S.) It is sometimes advantages to employ a genetic vaccine that is targeted for a particular target cell type (e.g., an antigen presenting cell or an antigen processing cell); suitable targeting methods are described in copending, commonly assigned U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/247,886, entitled “Targeting of Genetic Vaccine Vectors,” filed on Feb. 10, 1999 as TTC Attorney Docket No. 18087-030200US.

Genetic vaccines that encode the multivalent antigens described herein can be delivered to a mammal (including humans) to induce a therapeutic or prophylactic immune response. Vaccine delivery vehicles can be delivered in vivo by administration to an individual patient, typically by systemic administration (e.g., intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, subdermal, intracranial, anal, vaginal, oral, buccal route or they can be inhaled) or they can be administered by topical application. Alternatively vectors can be delivered to cells ex vivo, such as cells explanted from an individual patient (e.g., lymphocytes, bone marrow aspirates, tissue biopsy) or universal donor hematopoietic stem cells, followed by reimplantation of the cells into a patient, usually after selection for cells which have incorporated the vector.

A large number of delivery methods are well known to those of skill in the art. Such methods include, for example liposome-based gene delivery (Debs and Zhu (1993) WO 93/24640; Mannino and Gould-Fogerite ( 1988) Bio Techniques 6(7): 682-691; Rose U.S. Pat. No. 5,279,833; Brigham (1991) WO 91/06309; and Felgner et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 7413-7414), as well as use of viral vectors (e.g., adenoviral (see, e.g., Berns et al. (1995) Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 772: 95-104; Ali et al. (1994) Gene Ther. 1: 367-384; and Haddada et al. (1995) Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol. 199 (Pt 3): 297-306 for review), papillomaviral, retroviral (see, e.g., Buchscher et al., (1992) J. Virol. 66(5) 2731-2739;Johann et al. (1992) J. Virol. 66 (5):1635-1640 (1992); Sommerfelt et al., (1990) Virol. 176:58-59; Wilson et al. (1998) J. Virol. 63:2374-2378; Miller et al., J. Virol. 65:2220-2224 (1991); Wong-Staal et al., PCT/US94/05700, and Rosenburg and Fauci (1993) in Fundamental Immunology, Third Edition Paul (ed) Raven Press, Ltd., New York and the references therein, and Yu et al., Gene Therapy (1994) supra.), and adeno-associated viral vectors (see, West et al. (1987) Virology 160:38-47; Carter et al. (1989) U.S. Pat. No. 4,979,368; Carter et al. WO 93/24641 (1993); Kotin (1994) Human Gene Therapy 5:793-801; Muzyczka (1994) J. Clin. Invst. 94:1351 and Samulski (supra) for an overview of AAV vectors; see also, Lebkowski, U.S. Pat. No. 5,173,414; Tratschin et al. (1985) Mol. Cell. Biol. 5(11):3251-3260; Tratschin, et al. (1984) Mol. Cell. Biol., 4:2072-2081; Hermonant and Muzyczka (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 84:6466-6470; McLaughlin et al. (1988) and Samulski et al. (1989) J. Virol., 63:03822-3828), and the like.

“Naked” DNA and/or RNA that comprises a genetic vaccine can be introduced directly into a tissue, such as muscle. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,859. Other methods such as “biolistic” or particle-mediated transformation (see, e.g., Sanford et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,945,050; U.S. Pat. No. 5,036,006) are also suitable for introduction of genetic vaccines into cells of a mammal according to the invention. These methods are useful not only for in vivo introduction of DNA into a mammal, but also for ex vivo modification of cells for reintroduction into a mammal. As for other methods of delivering genetic vaccines, if necessary, vaccine administration is repeated in order to maintain the desired level of immunomodulation.

Genetic vaccine vectors (e.g., adenoviruses, liposomes, papillomaviruses, retroviruses, etc.) can be administered directly to the mammal for transduction of cells in vivo. The genetic vaccines obtained using the methods of the invention can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions for administration in any suitable manner, including parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, or intravenous), topical, oral, rectal, intrathecal, buccal (e.g., sublingual), or location administration, such as by aerosol or transdermally, for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment. Pretreatment of skin, for example, by use of hair-removing agents, may be useful in transdermal delivery. Suitable methods of administering such packaged nucleic acids are available and well known to those of skill in the art, and, although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention. A variety of aqueous carriers can be used, e.g., buffered saline and the like. These solutions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional, well known sterilization techniques. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, toxicity adjusting agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium lactate and the like. The concentration of genetic vaccine vector in these formulations can vary widely, and will be selected primarily based on fluid volumes, viscosities, body weight and the like in accordance with the particular mode of administration selected and the patient's needs.

Formulations suitable for oral administration can consist of (a) liquid solutions, such as an effective amount of the packaged nucleic acid suspended in diluents, such as water, saline or PEG 400; (b) capsules, sachets or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, as liquids, solids, granules or gelatin; (c) suspensions in an appropriate liquid; and (d) suitable emulsions. Tablet forms can include one or more of lactose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, calcium phosphates, corn starch, potato starch, tragacanth, microcrystalline cellulose, acacia, gelatin, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, talc, magnesium stearate, stearic acid, and other excipients, colorants, fillers, binders, diluents, buffering agents, moistening agents, preservatives, flavoring agents, dyes, disintegrating agents, and pharmaceutically compatible carriers. Lozenge forms can comprise the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth, as well as pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin or sucrose and acacia emulsions, gels, and the like containing, in addition to the active ingredient, carriers known in the art. It is recognized that the genetic vaccines, when administered orally, must be protected from digestion. This is typically accomplished either by complexing the vaccine vector with a composition to render it resistant to acidic and enzymatic hydrolysis or by packaging the vector in a appropriately resistant carrier such as a liposome. Means of protecting vectors from digestion are well known in the art. The pharmaceutical compositions can be encapsulated, e.g., in liposomes, or in a formulation that provides for slow release of the active ingredient.

The packaged nucleic acids, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be made into aerosol formulations (e.g., they can be “nebulized”) to be administered via inhalation. Aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like.

Suitable formulations for rectal administration include, for example, suppositories, which consist of the packaged nucleic acid with a suppository base. Suitable suppository bases include natural or synthetic triglycerides or paraffin hydrocarbons. In addition, it is also possible to use gelatin rectal capsules which consist of a combination of the packaged nucleic acid with a base, including, for example, liquid triglycerides, polyethylene glycols, and paraffin hydrocarbons.

Formulations suitable for parenteral administration, such as, for example, by intraarticular (in the joints), intravenous, intramuscular, intradermal, intraperitoneal, and subcutaneous routes, include aqueous and non-aqueous, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which can contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. In the practice of this invention, compositions can be administered, for example, by intravenous infusion, orally, topically, intrapertioneally, intravesically or intrathecally. Parenteral administration and intravenous administration are the preferred methods of administration. The formulations of packaged nucleic acid can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampoules and vials.

Injection solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described. Cells transduced by the packaged nucleic acid can also be administered intravenously or parenterally.

The dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to effect a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time. The dose will be determined by the efficacy of the particular vector employed and the condition of the patient, as well as the body weight or vascular surface area of the patient to be treated. The size of the dose will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a particular vector, or transduced cell type in a particular patient.

In determining the effective amount of the vector to be administered in the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection or other condition, the physician evaluates vector toxicities, progression of the disease, and the production of anti-vector antibodies, if any. In general, the dose equivalent of a naked nucleic acid from a vector is from about 1 μg to 1 mg for a typical 70 kilogram patient, and doses of vectors used to deliver the nucleic acid are calculated to yield an equivalent amount of therapeutic nucleic acid. Administration can be accomplished via single or divided doses.

In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient suffering from a disease (e.g., an infectious disease or autoimmune disorders) in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as a “therapeutically effective dose.” Amounts effective for this use will depend upon the severity of the disease and the general state of the patient's health. Single or multiple administrations of the compositions may be administered depending on the dosage and frequency as required and tolerated by the patient. In any event, the composition should provide a sufficient quantity of the proteins of this invention to effectively treat the patient.

In prophylactic applications, compositions are administered to a human or other mammal to induce an immune response that can help protect against the establishment of an infectious disease or other condition.

The toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of the genetic vaccine vectors provided by the invention are determined using standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. One can determine the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population) using procedures presented herein and those otherwise known to those of skill in the art.

A typical pharmaceutical composition for intravenous administration would be about 0.1 to 10 mg per patient per day. Dosages from 0.1 up to about 100 mg per patient per day may be used, particularly when the drug is administered to a secluded site and not into the blood stream, such as into a body cavity or into a lumen of an organ. Substantially higher dosages are possible in topical administration. Actual methods for preparing parenterally administrable compositions will be known or apparent to those skilled in the art and are described in more detail in such publications as Remington's Pharmaceutical Science, 15th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., (1980).

The multivalent antigenic polypeptides of the invention, and genetic vaccines that express the polypeptides, can be packaged in packs, dispenser devices, and kits for administering genetic vaccines to a mammal. For example, packs of dispenser devices that contain one or more unit dosage forms are provided. Typically, instructions for administration of the compounds will be provided with the packaging, along with a suitable indication on the label that the compound is suitable for treatment of an indicated condition. For example, the label may state that the active compound within the packaging is useful for treating a particular infectious disease, autoimmune disorder, tumor, or for preventing or treating other diseases or conditions that are mediated by, or potentially susceptible to, a mammalian immune response.

EXAMPLES

The following examples are offered to illustrate, but not to limit the present invention.

Example 1

Development of Broad-Spectrum Vaccines Against Bacterial Pathogens and Toxins

A. Evolution of Yersinia V-antigens

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to develop immunogens that produce strong cross-protective immune responses against a variety of Yersinia strains. Passive immunizations with anti-V-antigen antibodies or active immunization with purified V-antigen can provide protection from challenge with a virulent autologous Yersinia species. However, protection against heterologous species is limited (Motin et al. (1994) Infect. Immun. 63: 4192).

V-antigen genes from a variety of Yersinia strains, including serotypes of Y. pestis, Y. enterocolitica, and Y. pseudotuberculosis are subjected to DNA shuffling as described herein. The Yersinia pestis V antigen coding sequence, for example, is used as a query in a database search to identify homologous genes that can be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens. Results for a BLAST search of GenBank and EMBL databases are shown in Table 1, in which each line represents a unique sequence entry listing the database, accession number, locus name, bit score and E value. See, Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, for a description of the search algorithm). Homologous antigens have been cloned and sequenced from a number of related yet distinct Yersinia strains and additional natural diversity is obtained by cloning antigen genes from other stains. These genes and others or fragments thereof are cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 1
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
gb|M26405|YEPLCR	Yersinia pestis lcrG, lcrV,	1945	0.0
	and lcrH genes, co
gb|AF053946|AF053946	Yersinia pestis plasmid	1945	0.0
	pCD1, complete pla
emb|X96802|YPTPIVANT	Y. pseudotuberculosis V	1834	0.0
	antigen gene
gb|M57893|YEPLCRGVHP	Yersinia pseudotuberculosis	1818	0.0
	V-antigen
gb|AF080155|AF080155	Yersinia enterocolitica pYV	1723	0.0
	LcrV (lcrV) antigen
emb|X96801|YE96PVANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1667	0.0
	antigen gene, strain Y- . . .
emb|X96799|YE108VANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1659	0.0
	antigen gene, strain Y- . . .
emb|X96800|YE527VANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1651	0.0
	antigen gene, serotype . . .
emb|X96798|YE808VANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1643	0.0
	antigen gene, strain 8081
emb|X96796|YE314VANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1237	0.0
	antigen gene, strain WA.
emb|X96797|YENCTVANT	Y. enterocolitica V	1221	0.0
	antigen gene, strain NCTC
gb|S38727|S38727	lcrGVH operon: lcrV = V-	365	9e-99
	antigen [ Yersinia pseudo. ]

Shuffled clones are selected by phage display and/or screened by ELISA to identify those recombinant nucleic acids that encode polypeptides that have multiple epitopes corresponding to the different serotypes. The shuffled antigen genes are cloned into a filamentous phage genome for polyvalent phage display or a suitable phagemid vector for monovalent phage display. A typical protocol for panning antigens by phage display is as follows.

Coat an appropriate surface (e.g., Nun Maxisorp tube of multiwell plate) at 4° C. overnight with the target antibody, usually at a concentration of 1-10 μg/ml in PBS or other suitable buffer

Rinse and Block with PBSM (PBS+3% nonfat dry milk) at 37° C. for 1-2 hr

Pre-block phage if needed (PBSM, RT 1 hr)

Rinse tube and allow phage to bind (usually 1 hr @ 37° C.)

Can vary time, temp, buffer, add a competitive inhibitor, etc.

Wash extensively (15x) with PBST (PBS+0.1% TWEEN20), then PBS

Elute bound phage with low pH (e.g., 10 mM glycine), 100 mM triethylamine, competitive ligand, protease, etc. and then neutralize pH if needed.

Infect E. coli with eluted phage to transduce expression phagemid into new host. Titer and plate for colonies on drug plates

Pool colonies into media, grow cells and infect with helper phage to produce phage for next round

Phage ELISA assays are a useful method to rapidly evaluate single clones after panning of libraries. Single colonies are picked in individual wells of a multiwell plate containing 2YT media and grown as a master plate. A replicate plate is infected with helper phage and grown so that phage from a single well will display a single antigen variant. A suitable protocol for phage ELISA assays is as follows.

Coat microtiter plate with 50 μl of 1 μg/ml target antibody at 4° C. overnight

Rinse and block with PBSM for 2 hrs @ 37 2 C.

Rinse, add preblocked phage and allow to bind 1 hr @ 37° C.

Wash plates with PBST 3x, then PBS 3x with 2 min soaks

Add HRP(or AP)-conjugated anti-M13 antibodies for 1 hr @ 37° C.

Add substrate and measure absorbance

Identify positive clones for further evaluation

ELISA assays can also be used to screen for individual antigens with multiple epitopes or increased expression levels. Single colonies are picked in individual wells of a multiwell plate containing appropriate media and grown as a master plate so that antigens produced from a single well are a single antigen variant. A replicable plate is grown and induced for protein production, e.g., by addition of 0.5 mM IPTG for Lac repressor-based systems and grown for an appropriate time for the antigen to be produced. At this point a crude antigen preparation is made which depends on the antigen and where it is produced. Secreted proteins can be evaluated by assaying the cell supernatants after centrifugation. Periplasmic proteins are often readily released from cells by simple extraction into hyper- or hypo-tonic buffers. Intracellularly produced proteins will require some form of cell lysis such as detergent treatment to release them. A suitable protocol for ELISA assays is as follows.

Coat microtiter plate with 50 μl of 1 μg/ml target antibody 4° C. overnight

Rinse and block with PBSM for 2 hrs @ 37° C.

Rinse, add antigen prep and allow to bind 1 hr @ 37° C.

Wash plates with PBST 3x

Add HRP(or AP)-conjugated secondary antibody and incubate for 1 hr @ 37° C.

Add appropriate substrate and measure absorbance

Identify positive clones for further evaluation

Antibodies specific for many of the various antigens are commercially available (e.g., Toxin Technology, Inc, Sarasota, Fla.) or can be generated by immunizing suitable animals with purified antigens. Protein A or Protein G Sepharose (Pharmacia) can be used to purify immunoglobulins from the serum. Various affinity purification schemes can be used to further purify family-specific antibodies if needed such as immobilization of specific antigens to NHS-, CNBr-, or epoxy-activated sepharose beads. Other related antigens may be included soluble form to prevent binding and immobilization of cross-reactive antibodies.

The multivalent polypeptides that are identified by the initial screening protocol are purified and subjected to in vivo screening. For example, the shuffled antigens selected by a combination of any or none of these methods are purified and used to immunize animals, initially mice, which are then evaluated for improved immune responses. Typically 10 micrograms of protein is injected to a suitable location with or without appropriate adjuvant, e.g., Alhydrogel (EM Seargent Pulp and Chemical, Inc.) and the animals are boosted with an additional dose after 2-4 weeks. At this point serum samples is drawn and evaluated by ELISA assay for the presence of antibodies that cross-react against multiple parental antigens. In this ELISA assay format the antigens are coated onto multiwell plates, then serial dilutions of each sera is allowed to bind. After washing unbound antibodies, a secondary HRP- or AP-conjugated antibody directed against the appropriate test antibody constant region, e.g., goat anti-mouse IgG Fc (Sigma) is bound. After another washing, the appropriate substrate is added, e.g., O-phenylenediamine (Sigma). The absorbance of each well is ready by a plate reader at the appropriate wavelength (e.g., 490 nm for OPD) and those producing high antibody titers to multiple antigens are selected for further evaluation.

Additionally, the ability of antigens to generate neutralizing antibodies can be evaluated in an appropriate system. Antigen variants that elicit a broad cross-reactive response are evaluated further in a virulent challenge model with the appropriate pathogenic organism. For example, the multivalent polypeptides are used to immunize mice, which are then challenged with live Yersinia bacteria. Those multivalent polypeptides that protect against the challenge are identified and purified.

B. Evolution of broad-spectrum vaccines against bacterial toxins

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to obtain multivalent polypeptides that are effective in inducing an immune response against a broad spectrum of bacterial toxins.

1. Staphylococcus

The Group A Streptococci, which can cause diseases such as food poisoning, toxic shock syndrome, and autoimmune disorders, are highly toxic by inhalation. The family of Group A Streptococcus toxins numbers about 30 related members, making this group a suitable target for family shuffling. Accordingly, this Example describes the use of family DNA shuffling to create chimeric proteins that are capable of eliciting broad spectrum protection.

Nucleic acids that encode many diverse attenuated toxins are subjected to DNA shuffling as described herein. Table 2 shows the output of a BLAST search of GenBank, PDL, EMBL, and Swissprot using the S. aureus enterotoxin B protein to identify homologous genes that may be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens.

TABLE 2
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
sp|P01552|ETXB_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE B PRECURSOR (SEB) >g	554	e-157
pdb|1SE3|	Staphylococcal Enterotoxin B complexe	504	e-142
	Tri . . .
pdb|1SEB|D	Staphylococcus aureus >gi|1633348|pdf	406	e-113
	Staphyl . . .
sp|P23313|ETC3_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE C-3 PRECURSOR (SEC3)	376	e-103
sp|P01553|ETC1_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE C-1 PRECURSOR (SEC1)	368	e-101
sp|P34Q71|ETC2_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE C-2 PRECURSOR (SEC2) 361	2e-99
gi|295145	(L13376) enterotoxin [Staphylococcus	338	2e-92
gi|295151	(L13379) enterotoxin [Staphylococcus	332	2e-90
gi|295143	(L13375) enterotoxin [staphylococcus	330	4e-90
gi|295149	(L13318) enterotoxin [staphylococcus	329	1e-89
pdb|1JK|B	Chain B, T-Cell Receptor Beta Chain (	328	2e-89
	With S . . .
gi|1295141	(L13374) enterotoxin [Staphylococcus	328	3e-89
pdb|1SE2|	Staphylococcal Enterotoxin C2, Monoc.	327	4e-89
	Ente . . .
gi|1906052	(U91526) type C enterotoxin [Staphylo	326	8e-89
	intermed . . .
gi|1295147	(L13377) enterotoxin [Staphylococcus	323	7e-88
bbs|155101	enterotoxin = pyrogenic toxin [ Staphylc	319	1e-86
	4446, P . . .
gi|476764	(L29565) superantigen [Streptococcus	311	3e-84
gi|124512	(048792) superantigen SSA [Streptococ	310	4e-84
	pyogenes] >. . .
gi|1245174	(048793) superantigen SSA [Streptococ	309	1e-83
	pyogenes]
sp|P0B095|SPEA_STRPY	ENTOTOXIN TYPE A PRECURSOR (SCARLET FE	225	2e-58
gi|47288	(X61S60) type A exotoxin [Streptococc	211	3e-54
	pyogenes] >gi| . . .
pir||S18783	exotoxin type A precursor (allele 3)	211	4e-54
	Streptococcu . . .
pir||S18786	exotoxin type A precursor (allele 2)	209	2e-53
	Streptococcu...
pir||S18789	exotoxin A precursor (allele 4) - Str	206	8e-53
	pyo . . .
gi|47328	(X61554) type A exotoxin (Streptococc	196	9e-50
	pyogenes]
pir||A26152	Streptococcal pyrogenic exotoxin type	185	2e-46
	precursor - . . .
sp|P20723|EXTD_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE D PRECURSOR (SED) >g	131	3e-30
sp|P13163|EXTA_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE A PRECURSOR (SEA) >g	129	2e-29
prf||1704203A	enterotoxin A [Sstaphylococcus aureus ]	128	3e-29
pdb|1ESF|A	Staphylococcus aureus >gi|1633233|pdf	125	2e-28
	Staphyl . . .
pir||A29566	enterotoxin A - Staphylococcus aureus	125	2e-28
sp|P12993||ETXE_STAAU	ENTEROTOXIN TYPE E PRECURSOR (SEE) >g	118	3e-26
gi|510692	(U11702) enterotoxin H [Staphylococcu	98	7e-20
	>gi|10 . . .
gi|149047	(M94872) enterotoxin D [Plasmid p1848	89	2e-17
gi|2689563	(093688) enterotoxin [Staphylococcus	76	2e-13
gi|153785	(M97156) pyrogenic exotoxin C [Strept	57	8e-08
	pyogenes . . .
sp|P13380|SPEC_STRPY	EXOTOXIN TYPE C PRECURSOR (SPE C)	57	8e-08
gi|529754	(U02559) speC [ Streptococcus pyogenes	56	2e-07
pir||A30509	exotoxin C precursor - Streptococcus	56	2e-07
	>gi|. . .
gi|529755	(U02560) speC [ Streptococcus pyogenes	55	4e-07
pir||S27240	enterotoxin B - Staphylococcus	53	1e-06
	aureus (fragments)

Shuffled recombinant clones are initially selected by phage display and/or screened by ELISA for the presence of multiple epitopes from the different families. Variant proteins with multiple epitopes are purified and used to for in vivo screening as described above. The mouse sera are analyzed for antibodies specific for different toxin subtypes and variants that elicit broadly cross-reactive responses will be evaluated further in challenge models.

2. Escherichia coli and Vibrio cholerae

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to obtain cross-reactive multivalent polypeptides that induce an immune response against the E. coli heat-labile toxin (LT), cholera toxin (CT), and verotoxin (VT). Nucleic acids that encode cholera and LT toxin B-chains are subjected to DNA shuffling. Table 3 shows the results of a BLAST search using the V. cholerae toxin B-chain to identify homologous genes that can be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens. Homologous antigens have been cloned and sequenced from a number of related yet distinct Vibrio and E. coli strains, and additional natural diversity can be obtained by cloning antigen genes from other strains. These genes and others or fragments thereof can be cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 3
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
sp|P01556|CHTB_VIBCH	CHOLERA ENTEROTOXIN, BETA CHAIN PRECU	252	5e-67
gi|48890	(X5B7B5) cholera toxin B protein (CTF	248	8e-66
	cholera . . .
gi|758351	(X00171) ctx B [vibrio cholerae]	246	3e-65
prt||1001196A	toxin, cholera [vibrio cholerae]	246	3e-65
gnl|PID|d1006853	(D30052) cholera toxin [Vibrio chole	244	1e-64
pir||XVVCB	cholera enterotoxin chain B precursor	241	1e-63
	cholerae
gi|209556	(M23050) cholera toxin subunit B prec	228	7e-60
gi|209556	[Artificia . . .
	cholera-like enterotoxin B subunit [V	211	1e-54
bbs|168005	cholerae, . . .
sp|P13811|ELBH_ECOLI	HEAT-LABILE ENTERTOXII B CHAIN PRECU	209	5e-54
pdb|1XTC|D	Vibrio cholerae >gi |1827851|pdb|1XTC	207	2e-53
	choler . . .
pdb|1FGB|D	Vibrio cholerae >g1|1942839|pdb|1FGB	207	2e-53
	choler . . .
pdb|2CHB|D	Chain D, Cholera Toxin B-Pentamer Con	207	2e-53
	With GM1 . . .
pdb|1CHP|D	Vibrio cholerae >gi|1421512|pdb|1CHP	205	1e-52
	choler . . .
pdb|1CHQ|D	Vibrio cholerae >gi|1421526|pdb|1CHQ	205	1e-52
	choler . . .
pdb|1CT1|D	Chain D, Cholera Toxin B-Pentamer Mut	204	1e-52
	Bound . . .
sp|P32890||ELBP_ECOLI	HEAT-LABILE ENTEROTOXIN B CHAIN PRECU	204	2e-52
prt||0701264A	toxin LTB Cistron, heat labile Escher	201	9e-52
	coli ]
pir||QLECB	heat-labile enterotoxin chain B precu	201	2e-51
	Escheric . . .
bbs|131495	(S60731) heat-labile enterotoxin B su	200	2e-51
	B su . . .
prt||770290A	toxin [viorio cholerae]	199	6e-51
pdb|1LTA|D	Escherichia coli >gi|494266|pdb|1LTA	179	4e-45
	Escherichia c . . .
pdb|1TET|P	vibrio cholerae	34	0.31

Those chimeric toxins that elicit high levels of neutralizing antibodies against both toxins and have improved adjuvant properties are identified. For example, shuffled clones are selected by phage display and/or screened by ELISA assays for the presence of epitopes from the different parental B-chains. Variants with multiple epitopes are purified and further studied for their capacity to act as adjuvants and to elicit cross-protective immune responses in challenge models.

Example 2

Evolution of Broad-spectrum Vaccines against Borrelia burgdorferi

Lyme disease is currently one of the fastest-growing infectious diseases in the United States. It is caused by infection of the spirochete bacterium Borrelia burgdorferi, which is carried and spread by the bite of infected ticks. Early signs of infection include skin rash and flu-like symptoms. If left untreated Lyme disease can cause arthritis, heart abnormalities, and facial paralysis. Treatment of early Lyme diseases with antibiotics can stop the infection, but a lasting immunity may not develope making reinfection possible. A current vaccine requires three immunizations over a 1-year period to acquire immunity.

Both passive and active immunization with the purified B. burgdorferi outer surface protein A (OspA) protein has been successful in protecting against infection with B. burgdorferi, but has no effect against ongoing infections, since this antigen is not expressed in vertebrate hosts. OspA is normally anchored on the outside of the cell by a covalently attached lipid moiety through an amino terminal cysteine residue. In contrast, the outer surface protein C (OspC) is highly expressed by the spirochete in vertebrate hosts and vaccination of infected individuals with OspC may be an effective therapeutic in curing the infection (Zhong et al. (1997) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci USA 94 12533-12538.

A recent BLAST search (Altschul, et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402) of the non-redundant GenBank, PDB, SwissProt, Spupdate, and PIR databases was used to identify homologues of the OspA outer surface protein gene. This resulted in the identification of over 200 entries related to OspA. One hundred entries are shown in Table 4 below from different strains of B. burgdorferi, B. garinii, B. afzelii, B. tanukii, and B. turdi that share at least 83% DNA sequence identify to the Borrelia burgdorferi OspA protein. The ospA genes from these and other strains provide a source of diversity for family shuffling to obtain improved antigens for the prevention of Lyme disease. These genes are cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 4
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
dbj|AB016977|AB016977	Borrelia sp. gene for outer surface	1629	0.0
	prote . . .
dbj|Ab016978|AB016978	Borrelia sp. 10MT gene for outer	1614	0.0
	surface . . .
dbj|AB016975|AB016975	Borrelia turdi gene for outer surface	1526	0.0
	pro . . .
dbj|Ab016976|AB016976	Borrelia sp. gene for outer surface	1187	0.0
	prote . . .
gb|S48323|S48323	opsA = outer surface protein A (Borrelia	948	0.0
	gene frag . . .
emb|X80186|BBPTROOPS	B. burgdorferi PTro ospA gene	938	0.0
emb|X65598|BBOSPA1	B. burgdorferi OSp A gene (TRO)	938	0.0
gb|U20357|BB)20357	Borrelia burgdorferi C-1-11 outer	876	0.0
	surface pr . . .
gb|S88693|S88693	outer surface protein A ( Borrelia	858	0.0
	burgdorferi, . . .
emb|X66-65|BBPSPROA	B. burgdorferi OspA gene for outer	839	0.0
	surface p . . .
emb|X85440|BGTISOSPA	B. garinii ospA gene (Tlsl substrain)	839	0.0
emb|X85438|BAPLJOSPA	B. atzelli ospA gene (PLj7 substrain)	837	0.0
	<gi|9 . . .
emb|X80183|BBPBOOSPA	B. burgdorferi PBo ospA gene	829	0.0
emb|Z29087|BBOSPAY	B. burgdorferi (VS461) OspA gene for	821	0.0
	outer su . . .
emb|X85982|BADNAOSPA	B. atzelli ospA gene	821	0.0
emb|X62161|BBOSPAG	B. burgfdorferi plasmid ospA gene for	821	0.0
	outer su . . .
gb|078301|BBU78301	Borrelia atzelli major outer membrane	832	0.0
	surfac . . .
emb|X65599|BBPSPA2	B. burgdorferi Osp A gene (PKO)	819	0.0
emb|X70365|BBOPSAA	B. burgdorferi OspA gene	819	0.0
emb|X85439|BAPLUOSPA	B. atzelli ospA gene (PLud substrain)	813	0.0
emb|X80147|BBOPSA	B. burgdorferi plasmid OspA gene	813	0.0
gb|U020356|BAU20356	Borrelia atzelli BVI outer surface	813	0.0
	protein A . . .
emb|X85437|BAPHOOSPA	B. atzelli ospA gene (PHo substrain)	797	0.0
emb|X80253|BBPWUDLL	B. burgdorferi PWudll ospA gene	791	0.0
emb|229086|BBOSPAX	B. burgdorferi (g25) OspA gene for outer	791	0.0
	surf . . .
gb|L19702|BORMAJOSPR	Borrelia burgdorferi outer surface	791	0.0
	protein . . .
emb|X62387|BBSPA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene for outer	789	0.0
	surface prot . . .
emb|X60300|BBASPA	B. burgdorferi gene for OspA outer	785	0.0
	surface pro . . .
emb|X62624|BBK48OSPA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene	767	0.0
gb|M88764|BOROSPABA	Borrelia burgdorferi operon major outer	759	0.0
	mem . . .
dmb|X63412|BBPOSPA	B. burgdorferi plasmid ospA gene for	759	0.0
	outer su . . .
gb|L36036|BOROSPAL	Borrelia burgdorferi outer surface	743	0.0
	protein A . . .
gb|020358|BGO20358	Borrelia garinii LV4 outer surface	743	0.0
	protein A . . .
emb|X85442|BB297OSPA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene (297 substrain)	714	0.0
gb|L19701|BOROPSAB	Borrelia burgdorferi major outer	714	0.0
	surface pro . . .
emb|X14407|BBPSPAB	Borrelia burgdorferi ospA and ospB	706	0.0
	genes for . . .
gb|AE000790|AE000790	Borrelia burgdorferi plasmid 1p54,	706	0.0
	complet . . .
gb|020360|BB020360	Borrelia burgdorfeeri S-1-10 outer	706	0.0
	surface pr . . .
emb|X69606|BBKA0SPA	B. burgdorferi OspA gene	706	0.0
	>gi|1819262|gb|I284 . . .
dbj|AB007100|AB007100	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	702	0.0
	p . . .
gb|M57248|BOROSPA	B. burgdorferi outer surface protein A	698	0.0
	(OspA) . . .
emb|X80182|BBPKAOPSA	B. burgdorferi PKa ospA gene	698	0.0
dbj|AB007101|AB007101	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	694	0.0
	p . . .
emb|X85443|BBT250SPA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene (T255	692	0.0
	substrain)
emb|X16467|BBOSPA	Borrelia burgdorferi OspA gene for	690	0.0
	outer surf . . .
gb|020359|BB020359	Borrelia sp. LV5 outer surface protein	690	0.0
	A. pre . . .
gb|AF026059|AF026059	Borrelia burgdorferi 50 kDa plasmid	682	0.0
	lipopr . . .
emb|X85739|BBDNAOSPA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene	682	0.0
emb|X85441|BGWABOSPA	B. garinii ospA gene (WABSou substrain)	676	0.0
gb|U93709|U93709	Borrelia garinii outer surface protein	674	0.0
	A (ospA . . .
djb|AB007099|AB007099	Borrelia farinii gene for outer surface	662	0.0
	p . . .
emb|X80251|bBPHEIOSP	B. burgdorferi PHei ospA gene	660	0.0
gb|049190|FBU49190	Borrelia garinii major outer membrane	652	0.0
	surface . . .
emb|X65600|BBOSPA3	B. burgdorferi Osp A gene (HE)	652	0.0
dbj|D29660|D29660	Borrelia burgdorferi gene for	652	0.0
	outersurface pr . . .
djb|AB016979|AB016979	Borrelia valalsaina gene for outer	648	0.0
	surface . . .
dbj|AB007109|AB007109	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	646	0.0
	p . . .
gb|093707|093707	Borrelia garinii outer surface protein	644	0.0
	A (ospA . . .
dbj|AB007102|AB007102	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	642	0.0
	p . . .
dbj|AB001041|AB001041	Borrelia garinii DNA for outer surface	636	e-180
	pr . . .
dbj|Ab007114|AB007114	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	632	e-179
	p . . .
djb|AB007105|AB007105	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	632	e-179
	p . . .
gb|093710|093710	Borellia garinii outer surface protein	628	e-178
	A (ospA . . .
dbj|AB007106|AB007106	Borrelia garini gene for outer surface	624	e-177
	p . . .
dbj|AB007104|AB007104	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	624	e-177
	p . . .
gb|093706|093706	Borellia garinii outer surface protein	620	e-176
	A (ospA . . .
emb|X80256|BGPBROSPA	B. garinii PBr ospA gene	613	e-173
dbj|ab007108|AB007108	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	6-7	e-171
	p . . .
gb|L81129|BOROSPAY	Borrelia burgdorferi (isolate 2-1498	605	e-171
	297) ou . . .
gb|093711|093711	Borrelia garinii outer surface protein	605	e-171
	A (ospA . . .
dbj|AB007103|AB007103	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	587	e-165
	p . . .
gb|L81128|BOROSPAZ	Borrelia burgdorferi (isolate 2-1498	581	e-164
	SON 188 . . .
gb|L23137|BOROSPAC	Borrelia burgdorferi (27985CT2) OspA	577	e-162
	gene, 3 . . .
gb|L23139|BOROSPAE	Borrelia burgdorferi (42373NY3) OspA	577	e-162
	gene, 3 . . .
gb|L23142|BOROSPAI	Borrelia burgdorferi (CA3) OspA gene,	577	e-162
	3′end . . .
gb|L23136|BOROSPAA	Borrelia burgdorferi (B19CT1) OspA	577	e-162
	gene, 3′e . . .
gb|093705|U93705	Borrelia garinii outer surface protein	569	e-160
	A (ospA . . .
gb|L23140|BOROSPAF	Borrelia burgdorferi (41552MA) OspA	569	e-160
	gene, 3′. . .
dbj|AB007110|AB007110	Borelia garinii gene for outer surface	565	e-159
	p . . .
gb|L23143|BOROSPAJ	Borrelia burgdorferi (CA7) OspA gene,	561	e-158
	3′end . . .
dbj|AB007112|AB007112	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	557	e-156
	p . . .
emb|X80254|BGT250SPA	B. garinii T25 ospA gene	557	e-156
gb|U930708|U93708	Borrelia garinii outer surface protein	553	e-155
	A (ospA . . .
dbj|AB007107|AB007107	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	549	e-154
	p . . .
gb|L23141|BOROSPAH	Borelia burgdorferi (21343WI) OspA	5454	e-153
	gene, 3′. . .
dbj|AB007111|AB007111	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	541	e-152
	p . . .
dbj|AB007113|AB007113	Borrelli garinii gene for outer surface	537	e-151
	p . . .
gb|L23144|BOROSPAK	Borelli burgdorferi (CA8) OspA gene,	529	e-148
	3′end . . .
gb|U78549|BAU78549	Borrelia atzelli major outer membrane	525	e-147
	surfac . . .
dbj|AB009863|AB009863	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	519	e-145
	p . . .
emb|X68059|BBOSPAGE	b. burgdorferi OspA gene for outer	498	e-139
	surface p . . .
dbj|AB009862|AB009862	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	466	e-129
	p . . .
emb|X95360|BBOSPPFRA	B. burgdorferi ospA gene (strain PFra)	460	e-127
emb|X68541|BBPHEI	B. burgdorferi (PHEI) plasmid OspA gene	446	e-123
	for ou . . .
emb|X68540|BBPWUDI	B. burgdorferi (PWudi) plasmid OspA gene	414	e-114
	for . . .
emb|X95358|BGOSPPLI	B. garinii ospA gene (strain PLi)	414	e-114
dbj|AB009850|AB009860	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	393	e-107
	p . . .
dbj|AB009858|AB009858	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	365	8e-99
	p . . .
dbj|AB009861|AB009861	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	283	2e-74
	p . . .

A BLAST search with the B. burgdorferi OspC protein gene revealed over 200 related entries. Entries for one hundred sequences sharing at least 82% DNA sequence identify are shown in Table 5 below that provide a source of diversity for family shuffling to obtain improved therapeutics in the treatment of Lyme disease. These genes are cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 5
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
gb|U04282|BBUU4282	Borrelia burgdorferi GMP synthetase	1261	0.0
	(guaA) g . . .
gb|L42898|BOR31OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain 25015)	1124	0.0
	outer s . . .
gb|U01894|BBU01894	Borrelia burgdorferi B31 outer surface	622	e-176
	prote . . .
dbj|D49497|BOROSPCA	Borrelia burgdorferi gene for outer	622	e-176
	surface . . .
gb|AE000792|AE000792	Borrelia burgdorferi plasmid cp26,	622	e-176
	complete . . .
emb|X69596|BBB310SPC	B. burgdorferi ospC gene for outer	615	e-174
	surface . . .
gb|AF029860|AF029860	Borrelia burgdorferi CO1 outer surface	523	e-146
	pro . . .
gb|U91798|BBU91798	Borrelia burgdorferi strain L5 outer	519	e-145
	surface . . .
gb|L42887|BOR2OOSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain Ip2) outer	517	e-145
	sur . . .
gb|L81131|BOROSPCY	Borrelia burgdorferi ; substrai sensu	509	e-142
	strict . . .
gb|091792|BBU91792	Borrelia burgdorferi strain HII outer	478	e-133
	surfac . . .
gb|U91797|BBU91797	Borrelia burgdorferi strain IP3 outer	462	e-128
	surfac . . .
gb|U91801|BBU91801	Borrelia burgdorferi strain P1F outer	444	e-123
	surfac . . .
dbj|AB001377|AB001377	Borrelia japonica strain NO67 DNA for	430	e-118
	Out . . .
dbj|AB001378|AB001378	Borrelia japonica strain OvKK7 DNA for	430	e-118
	Ou . . .
emb|X84783|BBOSPCTXW	B. burgdorferi ospC gene (strain TXGW)	418	e-115
dbj|AB000355|AB000355	Borrelia tanukii DNA for Outer surface	418	e-115
	pr . . .
gb|091799_51 BBU91799	Borelia burgdorferi strain IPI outer	418	e-115
	surfac . . .
dbj|AB001376|AB001376	Borrelia japonica strain F131o DNA for	414	e-114
	Ou . . .
emb|X73624|BBOSPCC	B. burgdorferi (DK26) OspC gene	404	e-111
emb|X52162|BBPCG	B. burgdorferi gene for pC protein	398	e-109
emb−X69590|BBWUDOSPC	B. burgdorferi OspC gene, 3′ end	398	e-109
emb|X81521|BAOSPCI	B. atzelli (strain PBo) ospC gene	377	e-102
dbj|AB000345|AB000345	Borrelia atzelli DNA for Outer surface	365	6e-99
	pr . . .
dbj|AB009900|AB009900	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	361	9e-98
	p . . .
dbj|AB009899|AB009899	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	357	1e-96
	p . . .
emb|X81523|BAOSPC2	B. atzelli (strain PLj7) ospC gene	339	3e-91
gb|AF029871|AF029871	Borrelia burgdorferi OC12 outer surface	337	1e-90
	pr . . .
dbj|AB009897|AB009897	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	337	1e-90
	p . . .
dbj|AB000354|AB000354	Borrelia tanukii DNA for Outer surface	337	1e-90
	pr . . .
gb|L25413|BOROSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi membrane protein	335	5e-90
	(ospC) . . .
dbj|D49502|BOROSPCF	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	335	5e-90
	pro . . .
emb|X83555|BBDNAOSPC	B. burgdorferi ( B. pacificus strain)	333	2e-89
	ospC gene
gb|L42874|BOR100SPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain Orth)	331	8e-89
	outer su . . .
dbj|D49503|BOROSPCG	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	331	8e-89
	pro . . .
dbj|AB009894|AB009894	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	329	3e-88
	p . . .
gb|L42890|BOR23OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain E61) outer	329	3e-86
	sur . . .
gb|L42892|BOR25OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain acal)	329	3e-88
	outer su . . .
dbj|D49501|BOROSPCE	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	327	1e-87
	pro . . .
gb|004240|BBU04240	Borrelia burgdorferi GMP synthetase	317	1e-84
	(guaA) a . . .
gb|U04280|BBU04280	Borrelia burgdorferi GMP synthetase	317	1e-14
	(guaA) g . . .
dbj|AB009901|AB009901	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	309	3e-82
	p . . .
dbj|AB009893|AB009893	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	309	3e-82
	p . . .
gb|L42883|BOR170SPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain JSB) outer	307	1e-81
	sur . . .
gb|U04281|BBU04281	Borrelia burgdorferi HB18 outer surface	305	5e-81
	prot . . .
dbj|AB009696|AB009896	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	305	5e-81
	p . . .
emb|X81522|BBOSPC1	B. burgdorferi (strain PBre) ospC gene	297	1e-78
dbj|AB000349|AB000349	Borrelia atzelli DNA for Outer surface	297	1e-78
	pr . . .
emb|X73625|BBOSPCD	B. burgdorferi (DK7) OspC gene	297	1e-78
dbj|D49509|BOROSPCM	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	295	4e-78
	pro . . .
dbj|AB000346|AB000346	Borrelia afzelli DNA for Outer surface	293	2e-77
	pr . . .
gb|AF029870|AF029870	Borrelia burgdorferi OC11 outer surface	289	3e-76
	pr . . .
gb|L42895|BOR28OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain 28354)	289	3e-76
	outer s . . .
emb|X81524|BBOSPC2	B. burgdorferi (strain T255) ospC gene	289	3e-76
dbj|D88296|D88296	Borrelia atzelli 26kb circular plasmid	289	3e-76
	DNA fo . . .
emb|X81526|BGOSPC2	B. garinii (strain WABSou) ospC gene	285	4e-75
	<gi|8720 . . .
emb|X84772|BBOSPCD32	B. garinii ospC gene (strain DK32)	285	4e-75
dbj|AB009902|AB009902	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	285	4e-75
	p . . .
dbj|D49505|BOROSPC1	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	281	73-74
	pro . . .
gb|001892|BbU01892	Borrelia burgdorferi 2591 outer surface	281	73-74
	prot . . .
emb|X83552|BADNAOSPC	B. atzelli (PLud strain) ospC gene	280	3e-73
dbj|D49378|BOROSPC64	Borrelia garinii (strain HT64) ospC	278	1e-72
	gene f . . .
dbh|D49379|BOROSPCVS	Borrelia atzelli (strain V5461) ospC	274	2e-71
	gene . . .
gb|AF029864|AF029864	Borrelia burgdurferi OC5 outer surface	266	4e-69
	pro . . .
dbj|AB000350|AB000350	Borrelia atzelli DNA for Outer surface	266	4e-69
	pr . . .
gb|U08284|BBU08284	Borrelia burgdorferi 297 outer surface	264	2e-68
	prote . . .
dbj|AB000343|AB000343	Borrelia atzelli DNA for Outer surface	260	2e-67
	pr . . .
dbj|AB000353|AB000353	Borrelia tanukii DNA for Outer surface	258	1e-66
	pr . . .
emb|X84779|BBOSPCMUL	B. burgdorferi ospC gene (strain MUL)	256	4e-66
emb|X84768|BBOSPCD15	B. atzelli ospC gene (strainDKI5)	256	4e-66
dbj|D88292|D88292	Borrelia garinii 26kb circular plasmid	254	2e-65
	DNA fo . . .
dbj|D49507|BOROSPCK	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	254	2e-65
	pro . . .
emb|X83556|BGOSPCN34	B. garinni (N34 strain) ospC gene	250	2e-64
	pro . . .
dbj|D88294|D88294	B. garinni 26kb circular plasmid	250	2e-64
	dna fo . . .
gb|L42888|BOR21OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain H9) outer	246	4e-63
	surf . . .
gb|AF029862|AF029862	Borrelia burgdorferi OC3 outer surface	246	4e-63
	pro . . .
dbj|AB009891|AB009891	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	246	4e-63
	p . . .
dbj|AB009898|AB00998	Borrelia atzelli gene for outer surface	246	4e-63
	p . . .
gb|AF029861|AF029861	Borrelia burgorferi OC2 outer surface	246	4e-63
	pro . . .
emb|X695693|BBTNOSPC	B. burgdorferi OspC gene, 3′ end	246	4e-63
dbj|D49377|BOROSPC57	Borrelia garinni (strain HT57) ospC	244	1e-62
	gene f . . .
dbj|D49500|BOROSPCD	Borrelia garinnii gene for outer surface	244	1e-62
	pro . . .
gb|L429896|BOR29OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain 27579)	242	6e-62
	outer s . . .
dbj|D49376|BOROSPCTC	Borrelia garinii (strain TCLSK) ospC	240	2e-61
	gene . . .
gb|L42873|BOR9OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strian SIMON)	238	93-61
	outer su . . .
dbj|D49381|BOROSPC37	Borrelia garinii (strain HT37) ospC	238	9e-61
	gene f. . .
dbj|D49498|BOROSPCB	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	238	9e-61
	pro . . .
dmb|X59692|BBT25OSPC	B. burgdorferi OspC gene, 3′ end	232	6e-59
emb|X69594|BBPBROSPC	B. burgdorferi OspC gene, 3′ end	228	9e-58
dbj|D49506|BOROSPCJ	Borrelia garinni gene for outer surface	220	2e-55
	pro . . .
emb|X69596|BBPB1OSPC	B. burgdorferi ospC gene for outer	220	2e-55
	surface . . .
emb|X83554|BGOSPPTRO	B. garinii (PTrob strain) ospC gene	220	2e-55
emb|X73626|bbospce	B. burgdorferi (DK6) OspC gene	220	2e-55
gb|L42870|BOR6OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain VSDA)	220	2e-55
	outer sur . . .
gb|L42894|BOR27OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain 28691)	218	8e-55
	outer s . . .
dbj|D49504|BOROSPCH	Borrelia garinii gene for outer surface	208	8e-52
	pro . . .
gb|L42868|BOR4OSPC	Borrelia burgdorferi (strain ZS7) outer	206	3e-51
	surf . . .
dbj|AB000358|AB000358	Borrelia japonica DNA for Outer surface	204	1e-50
	p . . .
dbj|AB000351|AB000351	Borrelia japonica DNA for Outer surface	204	1e-50
	p . . .

Example 3

Evolution of Broad-spectrum Vaccines against Mycobacterium

Tuberculosis is an ancient bacterial disease caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis that continues to be an important public health problem worldwide and calls are being made for an improved effort in eradication ( Morb. Mortal Wkly Rep (Aug. 21, 1998; 47(RR-13): 1-6). It infects over 50 million people and over 3 million people will die from tuberculosis this year. The currently available vaccine, Bacille Calmette-Guerin (BCG) is found to be less effective in developing countries and an increasing number of multidrug-resistant (MDR) strains are being isolated.

The major immunodominant antigen of M. tuberculosis is the 30-35 kDa (a.k.a. antigen 85, alpha-antigen) which is normally a lipoglycoprotein on the cell surface. Other protective antigens include a 65-kDa heat shock protein, and a 36-kDa proline-rich antigen (Tascon et al. (1996) Nat. Med. 2: 888-92).

Table 6 shows the output of a BLAST search using the 30-35 kDa major M. tuberculosis antigen (a.k.a. antigen 85, alpha-antigen) coding sequence to identify homologous genes that may be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens. Many homologous antigens have been cloned and sequenced from a large number of related yet distinct mycobacterial strains. These genes are cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 6
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
gb|U38939|MTU38939	Mycobacterium tuberculosis 30 kDa	1939	0.0
	extracellu . . .
emb|X62398|MT85B	M. tuberculosis (strain Erdman) gene for	1939	0.0
	85-B a . . .
emb|Z97193|MTCY180	Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Rv	1939	0.0
	complete ge . . .
emb|X62397|MB858	M. bovis (strain 1173P2) gene for 85-B	1931	0.0
	antigen
gb|M21839|MSGBCGA	M. bovis BCG gene encoding alpha-	1869	0.0
	antigen, comp . . .
emb|X53897|MKAANTIG	Mycobacterium kansasii gene for alpha	819	0.0
	antigen
dbj|D26187|MSGAA	Mycobacterium scroturaceum DNA for	706	0.0
	aplha-atig . . .
dbj|D16546|MSGAAG	Mycobacterium intracellular gene for	581	e-164
	alpha-a . . .
emb|X63437|MAALANT	M. avium gene for alpha-antigen	569	e-160
dmb|D14253|MSGATCC139	Mycobacterium intracellulare DNA for	533	e-149
	alph . . .
gb|L01095|MSGB38COS	M. leprae genomic DNA sequence, cosmid	371	e-100
	B38 . . .
emb|X60934|ML85BA	M. leprae gene for 85-B antigen	363	4e-98
emb|Z11666|MLFBPAPR	M. leprae fibronectin-binding protein	347	2e-93
	antige . . .
gb|M27016|MSG32KDA	Mycobacterium tuberculosis 32 kDa	317	2e-84
	antigen gene.
emb|X53034|MB32PG	Mycobacterium bovis gene for 32 kDa	317	2e-84
	protein
dbj|D26486|MSG32KDAP	Mycobacterium bovis genes for 32 kDa	317	2e-84
	protei . . .
emb|AL022076|MTV026	Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Rv	317	2e-84
	complete g . . .
gb|047335|MTU47335	Mycobacterium tuberculosis	317	2e-84
	extracellular 32 . . .
dbj|D78142‘MSGBCGA85B	Mycobacterium bovis gene for alpha	309	5e-82
	antige . . .
emb|Y10378|MG85AANT	M. gordonae gene encoding 85-A antigen	303	3e-80
dbj|D78144|D78144	Mycobacterium avium gene for MPT51,	258	2e-66
	antigen 8 . . .
gb|M90648|MSG85AA	Mycobacterium leprae leprae 85-A antigen gene,	236	6e-60
	compl . . .
dbj|D43841|MSGA85A	Mycobacterium leprae DNA for antigen 85	222	8e-56
	com . . .
emb|X92567|MMAR1147	M. marinum gene for 32 kDa protein	218	1e-54
	(partial)
emb|Z33658|MA32KP16	M. avium (ATCC 19075) gene for 32 kDa	192	7e-47
	protein . . .
dbj|D87323|D87323	Mycobacterium avium gene for antigen	186	5e-45
	85C and . . .
emb|233657|MA32KP15	M. avium (ATCC 15769) gene for 32 kDa	184	2e-44
	protein . . .
emb|233662|MI32KP110	M. intracellulare (ATCC 13950) gene for	168	1e-39
	32k . . .
emb|X92566|MAS1A122	M. asiaticum gene for 32 kDa protein	168	1e-39
	(partial)
emb|Y07715|MA32KPRO1	M. asiaticum segment of 32 kDa	168	1e-39
	protein
emb|250760|MA32K511	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	168	1e-39
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50759|MA32K1112	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	167	4e-39
	(p . . .
emb|Z50767|MA32K769	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	161	3e-37
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50774|MA32K966	M. avicum comlex gene for 32 kDa protein	161	3e-37
	(pa . . .
emb|Z33659|MA32KP17	M. avicum (ATCC 19074) gene for 32 kDa	161	3e-37
	protein . . .
emb|Z33661|MI32K0I9	M. intracellulare (ATCC 35762) gene for	161	3e-37
	32kD . . .
emb|Z50763|MA32K559	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	161	3e-37
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50772|MA32K961	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	157	4e-36
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50765|MA32K576	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	153	6e-35
	(pa . . .
emb|250770|MA32K904	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	153	6e-35
	(pa . . .
emb|Z33367|MM32KP115	M. malmoense gene for 32 kDa protein	153	6e-35
	(partial)
emb|Z50768|MA32K814	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	153	6e-35
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50764|MA32K575	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	149	1e-33
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50762|MA32K558	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa progein	145	2e-32
	(pa . . .
emb|X57229″MT85CG	Mycobacterium tuberculosis gene for	145	2e-32
	antigen 8 . . .
emb|Z50761|MA32K554	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	145	2e-32
	(pa . . .
emb|Z92770|MTC15	Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Rv	145	2e-32
	complete geno . . .
emb|X92570|MSZUL8	M. szulgai gene for 32 kDa protein	141	2e-31
	(partial)
emb|Z50758|MA32K1076	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	127	4e-27
	(p . . .
emb|Z50766|MA32K577	M. avicum complex gene for 32 kDa protein	123	6e-26
	(pa . . .
emb|Z33654|MB32KP12	M. bovis (BCG) gene for 32 kDa protein	119	9e-25
	(parti . . .
emb|Xx92573|MTR1V151	M. triviale gene for 32 kDa protein	109	9e-22
	(partial)
emb|X92583|MCEL1236	M. celatum gene for 32 kDa protein	100	8e-19
	(partial)
emb|Z21950|ML85APRA	M. leprae of 85A protein gene	90	8e-16
	>gi|287923|emb . . .
gb|L78816|MSGB26CS	Mycobacterium leprae cosmid B26 DNA	88	3e-15
	sequence.
emb|Z21951|ML85CPRA	M. leprae of 85C protein gene	88	3e-15
gb|M90649|MSG85CA	Mycobacterium leprae 85-C antigen gene,	88	3e-15
	compl . . .
emb|X92582|MCEL1235	M. celatum gene for 32 kDa protein	86	1e-14
	(partial)
emb|X92577|MPHLE89	M. phlei gene for 32 kDa protein	82	2e-13
	(partial)
emb|X92581|MBRA1077	M. branderi gene for 32 kDa protein	82	2e-13
	(partial)
emb|Y07718|MF32KPRO4	M. flavescens gene segment of 32-kDa	82	2e-13
	protein
emb|X92575|MFORT131	M. fortuitum gene for 32 kDa protein	80	8e-13
	(partial)
emb|Z33663|MA32KP111	M. avium - intracellulare complex gene for	76	1e-11
	32 . . .
emb|X92576|MPERE132	M. peregrinum gene for 32 kDa protein	74	5e-11
	(partial)
emb|Z50776|MAH04894	M. avium complex gene for 32 kDa protein	68	3e-09
	(pa . . .
emb|X92571|MSENO201	M. xenopi gene for 32 kDa protein	68	3e-09
	(partial)
emb|Y07717|MS32KPRO3	M. smegmatis gene segment of 32-kDa	66	1e-08
	protein
emb|Z50769|MA32K822	M. avium complex gene for 32 kDa protein	60	7e-07
	(pa . . .
emb|Z50775|MAH03994	M. avium complex gene for 32 kDa protein	60	7e-07
	(pa . . .
emb|Y07719|MV32KPRO5	M. vaccae gene segment of 32-kDa protein	54	4e-05
emb|X92580|MVAC91	M. vaccae gene for 32 kDa protein	54	4e-05
	(partial)
emb|X92574|MNONC45	M. nonchromogenicum gene for 32 kDa 48	0.003
	protein ( . . .
emb|X92569|MSIMI95	M. simiae gene for 32 kDa protein	48	0.003
	(partial)
emb|AJ002150|MTAJ2150	Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Rv, MPT51	46	0.011
	gene
emb|Z79700|MTCY10D7	Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Rv	44	0.043
	complete g . . .
gb|M58472|ATOCAT	A. tumefaciens chloramphenicol	42	0.17
	acetyltransferas . . .
emb|X92578|MSMEG90	. smegmatis gene for 32 kDa protein	40	0.66
	(partial)
emb|X92572|MTER260	M. terrae gene for 32 kDa protein	40	0.66
	(partial)
emb|X92568|MSCRO149	M. scrotulaceum gene for 32 kDa protein	40	0.66
	(par . . .
emb|Z33666|MG32KP114	M. gordonae (ATCC 14470) gene for 32 kDa	40	0.66
	pro . . .
gb|M17700|FLCNPCA	Influenza C/California/78 nucleoprotein	38	2.6
	RNA ( . . .

Example 4

Evolution of Broad-spectrum Vaccines against Helicobacter pylori

Chronic infection of the gastroduodenal mucosae by Helicobacter pylori bacteria is responsible for chronic active gastritis, peptic ulcers, and gastric cancers such as adenocarcinoma and low-grade B-cell lymphoma. An increasing occurrence of antibiotic-resistant strains is limiting this therapy. The use of vaccines to both prevent and treat ongoing infections is being actively pursued (Crabtree JE (1998) Gut 43: 7-8; Axon AT (1998) Gut 43 Suppl 1: S70-3; Dubois et al. (1998) Infect. Immun. 66: 4340-6; Tytgat GN (1998) Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther. 12 Suppl 1: 123-8; Blaser MJ (1998) BMJ 316: 1507-10; Marchetti et al. (1998) Vaccine 16: 33-7; Kleanthous et al. (1998) Br. Med. Bull. 54: 229-41; Wermeille et al. (1985) Pharm. World Sci. 20: 1-17.

Identification of appropriate Helicobacter antigens for use in preventive and therapeutic vaccines can include two-dimensional gel electrophoresis, sequence analysis, and serum profiling (McAtee et al. (1998) Clin. Diagn. Lab. Immunol. 5:537-42; McAtee et al. (1998) Helicobacter 3: 163-9). Antigenic differences between related Helicobacter species and strains can limit the use of vaccines for prevention and treatment of infections (Keenan et al. (1998) FEMS Microbiol Lett. 161: 21-7).

In this Example, DNA family shuffling of related yet immunologically distinct antigens allows for the isolation of complex chimeric antigens that can provide a broad cross-reactive protection against many related strains and species of Helicobacter. Mouse models of persistant infection by mouse-adapted H. pylori strains that have been used to evaluate therapeutic use of vaccines against infection are used to evaluate shuffled antigens (Crabtree JE (1998) Gut 43: 7-8; Axon AT (1998) Gut 43 Suppl 1:S70-3).

The vacuolating cytotoxin (VacA) and cytotoxin associated gene products (CagA) have been evaluated as a vaccine against H. pylori infection in animal models which supports the application of this approach in humans.

Table 7 shows the results of a BLAST search using the H. pylori VacA gene to identify homologous genes that can be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens. Homologous antigens have been cloned and sequenced from a number of related yet distinct H. pylori strains and additional natural diversity can be obtained by cloning antigen genes from other strains. These genes and other or fragments thereof are cloned by methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 7
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
gb|U95971|HPU94971	Helicobacter pyliori 95-54	7874	0.0
	(J128) inactive cy . . .
gb|AE000598|HPAE000598	Helicobacter pyliori section	2468	0.0
	76 ot 134 of . . .
gb|AF001358|HPAF001358	Helicobacter pyliori	2405	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxi . . .
dmb|Z26883|HPCYTTOX	H. pyliori gene for	2389	0.0
	cytotoxin.
gb|U05677/HPU05677	Helicobacter pyliori 87-203	2389	0.0
	vacuolating cytot . . .
gb|U05676|HPU05676	Helicobacter pyliori 60190	2355	0.0
	cysteinyl-tRNA . . .
gb|U29401|HPU29401	Helicobacter pyliori	2345	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ho...
emb|AJ006969|HPY6969	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	2103	0.0
	gene, strain Mz28 . . .
gb|S72494|S72494	140 kda cytotoxin [	2050	0.0
	Helicobacter pylori ,
	Genomi . . .
gb|AJ006968|HPY6968	Helicobacter pyliori NCTC	2050	0.0
	11638 cysteinyl tRN . . .
emb|AJ006968|HPY6968	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	2032	0.0
	gene, strain Mz26 . . .
emb|AJ006970|HPY6970	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	1992	0.0
	gene, strain Mz29 . . .
gb|AF077939|AF077939	Helicobacter pyliori strain	1834	0.0
	166 vacuolating . . .
gb|AF077940|AF077940	Helicobacter pyliori strain	1814	0.0
	539 vacuolating . . .
gb|AF077941|AF077941	Helicobacter pyliori strain	1778	0.0
	549 vacuolating . . .
gb|AF077938|AF077938	Helicobacter pyliori strain	1746	0.0
	50 vacuolating . . .
gb|U63255|HPU63255	Helicobacter pyliori	835	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63270|HPU63270	Helicobacter pyliori	819	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63272|HPU63272	Helicobacter pyliori	819	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63283|HPU63283	Helicobacter pyliori	819	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63284|HPU63284	Helicobacter pyliori	819	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63262|HPU63262	Helicobacter pyliori	803	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63268|HPU63268	Helicobacter pyliori	8Q3	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63273|HPU63273	Helicobacter pyliori	803	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63282|HPU63282	Helicobacter pyliori	803	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63259|HPU63259	Helicobacter pyliori	795	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63276|HPU63276	Helicobacter pyliori	779	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63287|HPU63287	Helicobacter pyliori	779	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63263|HPU63263	Helicobacter pyliori	771	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63269|HPU63269	Helicobacter pyliori	771	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63286|HPU63286	Helicobacter pyliori	771	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63275|HPU63275	Helicobacter pyliori	763	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63279|HPU63279	Helicobacter pyliori	763	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63277|HPU63277	Helicobacter pyliori	755	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63280|HPU63280	Helicobacter pyliori	755	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63265|HPU63265	Helicobacter pyliori	747	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63267|HPU63267	Helicobacter pyliori	747	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63281|HPU63281	Helicobacter pyliori	741	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63261|HPU63261	Helicobacter pyliori	139	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63274|HPU63274	Helicobacter pyliori	739	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63285|HPU63285	Helicobacter pyliori	737	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009430|HPAJ9430	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	737	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009435|HPAJ9435	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	730	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009439|HPAJ9439	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	730	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U63271|HPU63271	Helicobacter pyliori	724	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009418|HPAJ9418	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	722	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009422|HPAJ9422	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	722	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U63256|HPU63256	Helicobacter pyliori	716	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63266|HPU63266	Helicobacter pyliori	716	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009420|HPAJ9420	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	714	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009424|HPAJ9424	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	714	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009431|HPAJ9431	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	714	0.0
gene (partial),
gb|U63260|HPU63260	Helicobacter pyliori	708	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
gb|U63278|HPU63278	Helicobacter pyliori	708	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009419|HPAJ9419	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	706	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009428|HPAJ9428	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	706	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009437|HPAJ9437	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	106	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ00942/1HPAJ9427	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	704	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U63257|HPU63257	Helicobacter pyliori	700	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ999423|HPAJ9423	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	698	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009432|HPAJ9432	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	692	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009417|HPAJ9417	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	688	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009421|HPAJ9424	Helicobacter pylori vacA	688	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009426|HPAJ9426	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	688	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009438|HPAJ9438	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	688	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U63264|HPU63264	Helicobacter pyliori	676	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009433|HPAJ9433	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	666	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009425|HPAJ9425	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	658	0.0
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U63258|HPU63258	Helicobacter pyliori	652	0.0
	vacuolating cytotoxin ge . . .
emb|AJ009442|HPAJ9442	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	626	e-177
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009444|HPAJ9444	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	626	e-177
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U80068|HPUB0068	Helicobacter pyliori strain	622	e-175
	213, vacuolating
emb|AJ009434|HPAJ9434	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	618	e-174
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009441|HPAJ9441	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	603	e-170
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|AF035616|HPVCP2	Helicobacter pyliori strain	599	e-168
	R34A vacuolating . . .
emb|AJ009447|HPAJ9447	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	587	e-165
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009440|HPAJ9440	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	563	e-158
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009436|HPAJ9436	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	555	e-155
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009443|HPAJ9443	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	555	e-155
	gene (partial), . . .
emb|AJ009446|HPAJ9446	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	555	e-155
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|U80067|HPU80067	Helicobacter pyliori strain	553	e-155
	184, vacuolating . . .
gb|AF042735|AF042735	Helicobacter pyliori JK22	553	e-155
	vacuolating cytot . . .
emb|AJ009445|HPAJ9445	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	547	e-153
	gene (partial), . . .
gb|AF035609|AF035609	Helicobacter pyliori strain	547	e-153
	R10A vacuolatin . . .
gb|AF042134|AF042734	Helicobacter pyliori JK1	537	e-150
	vacuolating cytoto . . .
gb|AF035612|AF035612	Helicobacter pyliori strain	347	9e-93
	R26A vacuolatin . . .
gb|AF035613|AF035613	Helicobacter pyliori strain	323	1e-85
	R40A vacuolatin . . .
emb|AJ006967|HPY6967	Helicobacter pyliori vacA	317	8e-84
	gene, strain Mz19 . . .
gb|AF035615|HPVCP1	Helicobacter pyliori strain	315	3e-83
	R34A vacuolating . . .
gb|AF035614|AF035614	Helicobacter pyliori strain	301	8e-81
	R50A vacuolatin . . .
gb|U91578|HPU91578	Helicobacter pyliori strain	109	4e-21
	F37 vacA gene, pa . . .
gb|U91579|HPU91579	Helicobacter pyliori strain	109	4e-21
	F79 vacA gene, pa . . .
gb|U91575|HPU91575	Helicobacter pyliori strain	107	1e-20
	F84 vacA gene, pa . . .
emb|Y14742|HPVACA26	Helicobacter pyliori partial	101	9e-19
	vacA gene, stra . . .
gb|U91577|HPU91577	Helicobacter pyliori strain	100	3e-18
	F94 vacA gene, pa . . .
gb|U91576|HPU91576	Helicobacter pyliori strain	100	3e-18
	F71 vacA gene, pa . . .
gb|AF035610|AF035610	Helicobacter pyliori strain	94	2e-16
	R13A vacuolatin . . .
gb|U91580|HPU91580	Helicobacter pyliori strain	92	8e-16
	F80 vacA gene, pa . . .
gb|AF035611|AF035611	Helicobacter pyliori strain	92	8e-16
	R59A vacuolatin . . .
emb|Y14744|HPVACA49	Helicobacter pyliori partial	88	1e-14
	vacA gene, stra . . .

Table 8 shows the results of a BLAST search using the H. pylori CagA gene to identify homologous genes that can be used in a family shuffling format to obtain improved antigens. Homologous antigens have been cloned and sequenced from a number of related yet distinct H. pylori strains and additional natural diversity can be obtained by cloning antigen genes from other strains. These genes and others or fragments thereof are be cloned to methods such as PCR, shuffled and screened for improved antigens.

TABLE 8
Sequences producing significant alignments
		Score	E
Database/Accession No.	Gene	(bits)	Value
gb|AF083352|AF083352	Helicobacter pylori cytotoxin associated p . . .	7041	0.0
gb|AE000569|HPAE000569	Helicobacter pylori section 47 of 134 of . . .	5501	0.0
gb|L11714|HECMAJANT	Helicobacter pylori major antigen gene	4976	0.0
	sequ . . .
emb|X70039|HPCAI	H. pylori cai gene for cytotoxicity associated	4294	0.0
gb|U60176|HPU60176	Helicobacter pylori cag pathogenicity	4294	0.0
	island . . .
dbj|AB003397|AB003397	Helicobacter pylori DNA for CagA,	4274	0.0
	complet . . .
gb|U80066|HPU80066	Helicobacter pylori strain 213, cytotoxin-	349	2e-93
	as . . .
gb|U80065|HPU80065	Helicobacter pylori strain 184, cytotoxin-	343	1e-91
	as . . .
gb|AF043488|AF043488	Helicobacter pylori JK252 cytotoxicity	178	4e-42
	ass . . .
gb|AF043487|AF043487	Helicobacter pylori JK25 cytotoxicity	170	1e-39
	asso . . .
gb|AF043489|AF043489	Helicobacter pylori JK269 cytotoxicity	163	2e-37
	ass . . .
emb|X70038|HPCAIDUP	H. pylori DNA duplication sequence within	159	4e-36
	th . . .
gb|AF043490|AF043490	Helicobacter pyliori JK22 cytotoxicity	153	2e-34
	asso . . .

Example 5

Development of Broad-Spectrum Vaccines Against Malaria

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to generate improved vaccines against malaria infection. An excellent target for evolution by DNA shuffling is the Plasmodium falciparum merozoite surface protein, MSP 1 (Hui et al. (1996) Infect. Immun. 64: 1502-1509). MSP 1 is expressed on the surface of merozoites as an integral membrane protein. It is cleaved by parasite proteases just before and concomitant with rupture and release from infected cells. The cleavage appears to be obligatory for full function is MSP 1 binding to RBC receptors. The cleaved fragments remain attached to the membrane of the merozoite. Other membrane proteins on merozoites also participate in the attachment and specific invasion events. MSP 1 is a proven candidate for inclusion in a vaccine against the asexual blood stage of malaria.

The genes encoding MSP 1 can be isolated from various isolates of Plasmodium falciparum merozoites by PCR technology. Related naturally existing genes can be additionally used to increase the diversity of the starting genes. A library of shuffled MSP1 genes is generated by DNA shuffling, and this library is screened for induction of efficient immune responses.

The screening can be done by injecting individual variants into test animals, such as mice or monkeys. Either purified recombinant proteins, or DNA vaccines or viral vectors encoding the relevant genes are injected. Typically, a booster injection is given 2-3 weeks after the first injection. Thereafter, the sera of the test animals are collected and these sera are analyzed for the presence of antibodies that reduce invasion of merozoites into uninfected erythrocytes (RBC). RBC are infected by the merozoite, immediately inside the RBC, the merozoite differentiates into a ring and this matures to a schizont that contains several nascent daughter merozoites, which then burst out of the infected cell, destroying it, and go on to attach and invade another RBC. In vivo, the merozoite is likely only extracellular for seconds. In vitro, any blockade of this event can dramatically reduce the level of reinfection. Antibodies against MSP 1 bind to the surface of merozoites that are released from schizont infected RBC when they rupture and thereby reduce the ability of these merozoites to attach and engage cognate RBC receptors on the uninfected RBC surface. Merozoite attachment is reduced, merozoite entry into new RBC is reduced, and the numbers of newly invaded cells detected at the early ring stage is therefore reduced if the culture is examined several hours after the blockade of invasion test. In some assay formats a surrogate of merozoite invasion inhibition is to note the appearance of agglutinated merozoites, although this is an indirect measure of antibodies that cause reduced invasion.

The shuffled antigens that induce the most potent antibody responses reducing invasion of merozoites into uninfected erythrocytes are selected for further testing and can be subjected to new rounds of shuffling and selection. In subsequent studies, the capacity of thee antigens to induce antibodies in man is investigated. Again, either purified recombinant antigens, or DNA vaccines or viral vectors encoding the relevant genes are injected and protective immune responses are analyzed.

Example 6

Development of Broad-Spectrum Vaccines Against Viral Pathogens

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to obtain vaccines that can induce an immune response against multiple isolates of viral pathogens.

A. Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (VEE)

VEE belongs to the alphavirus genus, which are generally transmitted by mosquitoes. However, VEE is an unusual alphavirus in that it is also highly infectious by aerosol inhalation for both humans and rodents. The disease manifestations in humans range from subclinical or mild febrile disease to serious infection and inflammation of the central nervous system. Virus clearance coincides that of production of specific anti-VEE antibodies, which are believed to be the primary mediators of protective immune responses (Schmaljohn et al. (1982) Nature 297: 70). VEE is an unusual virus also because its primary target outside the central nervous system is the lymphoid tissue, and therefore, replication defective variants may provide means to target vaccines or pharmaceutically useful proteins to the immune system.

At least seven subtypes of VEE are known that can be identified genetically and serologically. Based on epidemiological data, the virus isolates fall into two main categories: I-AB and I-C strains, which are associated with VEE epizootics/epidemics, and the remaining serotypes, which are isolated primarily with enzootic vertebrate-mosquito cycles and circulate in specific ecological zones (Johnston and Peters, In Fields Virology, Third Edition, eds. B. N. Fields et al., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, 1996).

The envelope protein (E) appears to be the major antigen in inducing neutralizing Abs. Accordingly, DNA shuffling is used to obtain a library of recombinant E proteins by shuffling the corresponding genes derived from various strains of VEE. These libraries and individuals chimeras/mutants thereof are subsequently screened for their capacity to induce widely cross-reacting and protective Ab responses.

B. Flaviviruses

Japanese encephalitis virus (JE), Tick-borne encephalitis virus (TBE) and Dengue virus are arthropod-borne viruses belonging to the Flavivirus family, which comprises 69 related viruses. The heterogeneity of the viruses within the family is a major challenge for vaccine development. For example, there are four major serotypes of Dengue virus, and a tetravalent vaccine that induces neutralizing Abs against all four serotypes is necessary. Moreover, non-neutralizing antibodies induced by infection or vaccination by one Dengue virus may cause enhancement of the disease during a subsequent infection by another serotype. Therefore, cross-protective, broad spectrum for TBE and JE would provide sufficient improvement to the existing vaccines. In this Example, the ability of DNA shuffling to efficiently generate chimeric and mutated genes is used to generate cross-protective vaccines.

1. Japanese encephalitis virus

Japanese encephalitis virus (JE) is a prototype of the JE antigenic complex, which comprises St. Louis encephalitis virus, Murray Valley encephalitis virus, Kunjin virus and West Nile virus (Monath and Heinz, In Fields Virology, Third Edition, eds. B. N. Fields et al. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 961-1034, 1996). Infections caused by JE are relatively rare, but the case-fatality is 5-40% because no specific treatment is available. JE is widely distributed in China, Japan, Philippines, far-eastern Russia and India providing a significant threat to those traveling in these areas. Currently available JE vaccine is produced from brain tissues of mice infected with single virus isolate. Side effects are observed in 10% to 30% of the vaccines.

To obtain chimeric and/or mutated antigens that provide a protective immune response against all or most of the viruses within the JE complex, DNA shuffling is performed on viral envelope genes. The amino acid identity within the JE complex varies between 72% and 93%. In addition, significant antigenic variation has been observed among JE strains by neutralization assays, agar gel diffusion, antibody absorption and monoclonal antibody analysis (Oda (1976) Kobe J. Med. Sci. 22: 123; Kobyashi et al. (1984) Infect. Immun. 44: 117). Moreover, the amino acid divergence of the envelope protein gene among 13 strains from different Asian countries is as much as 4.2% (Ni and Barrett (195) J. Gen. Virol. 76: 401). The resulting library of recombinant polypeptides encoded by the shuffled genes is screened to identify those that provide a cross-protective immune response.

2. Tick-borne encephalitis virus

The tick-borne encephalitis virus complex comprises 14 antigenically related viruses, eight of which cause human disease, including Powassan, Louping ill and Tick-borne encephalitis virus (TBE) (Monath and Heinz, In Fields Virology, Third Edition, eds. B. N. Fields et al., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 961-1034, 1996). TBE has been recognized in all Central and Eastern European countries, Scandinavia and Russia, whereas Powassan occurs in Russia, Canada and the United States. The symptoms vary from flu-like illness to severe meningitis, meningoencephalitis and meningoencephalitis with a fatality rate of 1% to 2% (Gresikova and Calisher, In Monath ed., The arboviruses: ecology and epidemilogy, vol. IV, Boca Raton, Fla., CRC Press, pp. 177-203, 1998).

Family DNA shuffling is used to generate chimeric envelope proteins derived from the TBE complex to generate crossprotective antigens. The envelope proteins within the family are 77-96% homologous, and viruses can be distinguished by specific mAbs (Holzmann et al., Vaccine, 10, 345, 1992). The envelope protein of Powassan is 78% identical at the amino acid level with that of TBE, and cross-protection is unlikely, although epidemiological data is limited.

Langat virus is used as a model system to analyze protective immune responses in vivo (Iacono-Connors et al. (1996) Viruses Res. 43: 125). Langat virus belongs to the TBE complex, and can be used in challenge studies in BSL3 facilities. Serological studies based on recombinant envelope proteins are performed to identify immunogen variants that induce high levels of antibodies against envelope proteins derived from most or all viruses of the TBE complex.

3. Dengue viruses

Dengue viruses are transmitted though mosquito bites, posing a significant threat to troops and civilian populations particularly in tropical areas. There are four major serotypes of Dengue virus, namely Dengue 1, 2, 3 and 4. A tetravalent vaccine that induces neutralizing antibodies against all four strains of Dengue is required to avoid antibody-mediated enhancement of the disease when the individual encounters the virus of the other strain.

The envelope protein of Dengue virus has been shown to provide an immune response that protects from a future challenge with the same strain of virus. However, the levels of neutralizing antibodies produced are relatively low and protection from live virus challenge is not always observed. For example, mice injected with genetic vaccines encoding envelope protein of Dengue-2 virus developed neutralizing antibodies when analyzed by in vitro neutralization assays, but the mice did not survive the challenge with live Dengue-2 virus (Kochel et al. (1997) Vaccine 15: 547-552). However, protective immune responses were observed in mice immunized with recombinant vaccina virus expressing Dengue 4 virus structural proteins (Bray et al. (1989) J. Virol. 63: 2853). These studies indicate that vaccinations with E proteins work, but significant improvements in the immunogenicity of the protective antigens are required.

In this Example, DNA shuffling is performed on the genes encoding the envelope (E) protein from all four Dengue viruses and their antigenic variants. Family DNA shuffling is used to generate chimeric E protein variants that induce high titer neutralizing antibodies against all serotypes of Dengue. The E proteins of the different dengue viruses share 62% to 77% of their amino acids. Dengue 1 and Dengue 3 are most closely related (77% homologous), followed by Dengue 2 (69%) and Dengue 4 (62%). These homologies are well in the range that allows efficient family shuffling (Crameri et al. (1998) Nature 391: 288-291).

The shuffled antigen sequences are incorporated into genetic vaccine vectors, the plasmids purified, and subsequently injected into mice. The sera are collected from the mice and analyzed for the presence of high levels of cross-reactive antibodies. The best antigens are selected for further studies using in vivo challenge models to screen for chimeras/mutants that induce cross-protection against all strains of Dengue.

C. Improved Expression and Immunogenicity of Hantaan virus Glycoproteins

One of the advantages of genetic vaccines is that vectors expressing pathogen antigens can be generated even when the given pathogen cannot be isolated in culture. An example of such potential situation was an outbreak of severe respiratory disease among rural residents of the Southwestern United States which was caused by a previously unknown hantavirus, Sin Nombre virus (Hjelle et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68: 592). Much RNA sequence information of the virus was obtained well before the virus could be isolated and characterized in vitro. In these situations, genetic vaccines can provide means to generate efficient vaccines in a short period of time by creating vectors encoding antigens encoded by the pathogen. However, genetic vaccines can only work if these antigens can be properly expressed in the host.

Hantaan virus belongs to the Bunyavirus family. A characteristic feature of this family is that their glycoproteins typically accumulate at the membranes of the Golgi apparatus when expressed by cloned cDNAs, thereby reducing the efficacy of corresponding genetic vaccines (Matsuoka et al. (1991) Curr. Top. Microb. Immunol. 169: 161-179). Poor expression of Hantaan virus glycoproteins on the cell surface is also one explanation for poor immune responses following injections of Hantaan virus genetic vaccines.

In this Example, family DNA shuffling is used to generate recombinant Hantaan virus derived glycoproteins that are efficiently expressed in human cells and that can induce protective immune responses against the wild-type pathogen. Nucleic acids that encode the Hantaan virus glycoprotein are shuffled with genes that encode other homologous Bunyavirus glycoproteins. The resulting library is screened to identify proteins that are readily expressed in human cells. The screening is performed using a dual marker expression vector that enables simultaneous analysis of transfection efficiency and expression of fusion proteins that are PIG-linked to the cell surface (Whitehorn et al. (1995) Biotechnology (N Y) 13:1215-9).

Flow cytometry based cell sorting is used to select Hantaan virus glycoprotein variants that are efficiently expressed in mammalian cells. The corresponding sequences are then obtained by PCR or plasmid recovery. These chimeras/mutants are further analyzed for their capacity to protect wild mice against Hantaan virus infections.

Example 7

DNA Shuffling of HSV-1 and HSV-2 Glycoproteins B and/or D as Means to Induce Enhanced Protective Immune Responses

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to obtain HSV glycoprotein B (gB) and glycoprotein D (gD) polypeptides that exhibit improved ability to induce protective immune responses upon administration to a mammal. Epidemiological studies have shown that prior infections with HSV-1 give partial protection against infections with HSV-2, indicating existence of cross-reactive immune responses. Based on previous vaccination studies, the main immunogenic glycoproteins in HSV appear to be gB and gD, which are encoded by 2.7 kg and 1.2 kg genes, respectively. The gB and gD genes of HSV-1 are about 85% identical to the corresponding gene of HSV-2, and the gB genes of each share little sequence identity with the gD genes. Baboon HSV-2 gB is appr. 75% identical to human HSV-1 or -2 gB, with rather long stretches of almost 90% identity. In addition, 60-75% identity is found in portions of the genes of equine and bovine herpesviruses.

Family shuffling is employed using as substrates nucleic acids that encode gB and/or gD from HSV-1 and HSV-2. Preferably, homologous genes are obtained from HSVs of various strains. An alignment of gD nucleotide sequences from HSV-1 and two strains of HSV-2 is shown in FIG. 7 . Antigens encoded by the shuffled nucleic acids are expressed and analyzed in vivo. For example, one can screen for improved induction of neutralizing antibodies and/or CTL responses against HSV-1/HSV-2. One can also detect protective immunity by challenging mice or guinea pigs with the viruses. Screening can be done using pools or individuals clones.

Example 8

Evolution of HIV Gp120 Proteins for Induction of Broad Spectrum Neutralizing Ab Responses

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to generate immunogens that crossreact among different strains of viruses, unlike the wild-type imunogens. Shuffling two kinds of envelope sequences can generate immunogens that induce neutralizing antibodies against a third strain.

Antibody-mediated neutralization of HIV-1 is strictly type specific. Although neutralizing activity broadens in infected individuals over time, induction of such antibodies by vaccination has been shown to be extremely difficult. Antibody-mediated protection from HIV-1 infection in vivo correlates with antibody-mediated neutralization of virus in vitro.

FIG. 8 illustrates the generation of libraries of shuffled gp120 genes. gp120 genes derived from HIV-1DH12 and HIV-1IIIB(NL43) are shuffled. The chimeric/mutant gp120 genes are then analyzed for their capacity to induce antibodies that have broad spectrum capacity to neutralize different strains of HIV. Individual shuffled gp120 genes are incorporated into genetic vaccine vectors, which are then introduced to mice by injection or topical application onto the skin. These antigens can also be delivered as purified recombinant proteins. The immune responses are measured by analyzing the capacity of the mouse sera to neutralize HIV growth in vitro. Neutralization assays are performed against HIV-1DH12, HIV-1IIIB and HIV-189.6. The chimeras/mutants that demonstrate broad spectrum neutralization are chosen for further rounds of shuffling and selection. Additional studies are performed in monkeys to illustrate the capacity of the shuffled gp120 genes to provide protection for subsequent infection with immunodeficiency virus.

Example 9

Antigen Shuffling of the Hepadnavirus Envelope Protein

The Hepatitis B virus (HBV) is one of a member of a family of viruses called hepadnaviruses. This Example describes the use of genomes and individual genes from this family are used for DNA shuffling, which results in antigens having improved properties.

A. Shuffling of Hepadnavirus envelope protein genes

The envelope protein of the HBV assembles to form particles that carry the antigenic structures collectively known as the Hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg; this term is also used to designate the protein itself). Antibodies to the major antigen site, designated the “a” epitope (which is found in the envelope domain called S), are capable of neutralizing the virus. Immunization with the HBsAg-bearing protein thus serves as a vaccine against viral infection. The HBV envelope also contains other antigenic sites that can protect against viral infection and are potentially vital components of an improved vaccine. The epitopes are part of the envelope protein domains known as preS1 and preS2 (FIG. 9 ).

DNA shuffling of the envelope gene from several members of the hepadnavirus family is used to obtain more immunogenic proteins. Specifically, the genes from the following hepatitis viruses are shuffled.

the human HBV viruses, subtypes ayw and adw2

a hepatitis virus isolated from chimpanzee

a hepatitis virus isolated from gibbon

a hepatitis virus isolated form woodchuck

If desired, genes from other genotypes of the human virus are available for inclusion in the DNA shuffling reactions. Likewise, other animal hepadnaviruses are available.

To promote the efficiency of the formation of chimeras resulting from DNA shuffling, some artificial genes are made:

In one case, a synthetic gene is made that contains the HBV envelope sequences, except for those codons which specify amino acids found in the chimpanzee and gibbon genes. For those codons, the chimpanzee or gibbon sequence is used.

In a second case, a synthetic gene is synthesized in which the preS2 gene sequence from the human HBV adw2 strain is fused with the woodchuck S region.

In a third case, all the oligonucleotides required to chemically synthesize each of the hepadnavirus envelope genes are mixed in approximately equal quantities and allowed to anneal to form a library of sequences.

After DNA shuffling of the hepadnavirus envelope genes, either or both of two strategies are used to obtain improved HBsAg antigens.

Strategy A: Antigens are screened by immunizing mice using two possible methods. The genes are injected in the form of DNA vaccines, i.e., shuffled envelope genes carried by a plasmid that comprises the genetic regulatory elements required for expression of the envelope proteins. Alternatively, the protein is prepared from the shuffled genes and used as the immunogen.

The sequences that give rise to greater immunogenicity for either the preS1-, preS2- or S-borne HBV antigens are selected for a second round of shuffling (FIG. 10 ). For the second round, the best candidates are chosen based on their improved antigenicity and their other properties such as higher expression level or more efficient secretion. Screening and further rounds of shuffling are continued until a maximum optimization for one of the antigenic regions is obtained.

The individually optimized genes are then used as a combination vaccine for the induction of optimal responses to preS1-, preS2- and S-born epitopes.

Strategy B: After isolation of the individually optimized genes as in Strategy A, the preS1, preS2 and S candidates are shuffled together, or in a pairwise fashion, in further rounds to obtain genes which encode proteins that demonstrate improved immunogenicity for at least two regions containing HBsAg epitopes (FIG. 11 ).

B. Use of HBsAg to carry epitopes from unrelated antigens

Several of the characteristics of the HBsAg make it a useful protein to carry epitopes drawn from other, unrelated antigens. The epitopes can be either B epitopes (which induce antibodies) or T epitopes drawn from the class I type (which stimulate CD8 + T lymphocytes and induced cytotoxic cells) or class II type (which induce helper T lymphocytes and are important in providing immunological memory responses.

1. B cell epitopes

Amino acid sequences of potential B epitopes are chosen from any pathogen. Such sequences are often known to induce antibodies, but the immunogenicity is weak or otherwise unsatisfactory for preparation of a vaccine. These sequences can also be mimotopes, which have been selected based on their ability to have a certain antigenicity or immunogenicity.

The amino acid coding sequences are added to a hepadnavirus envelope gene. The heterologous sequences can either replace certain envelope sequences, or be added in addition to all the envelope sequences. The heterologous epitope sequences can be placed at any position in the envelope gene. A preferred position is the region of the envelope gene that encodes the major “a” epitope of the HBsAg (FIG. 12 ). This region is likely to be exposed on the external side of the particles formed by the envelope protein, and thus will expose the heterologous epitopes.

DNA shuffling is carried out on the envelope gene sequences, keeping the sequence of the heterologous epitopes constant. Screening is carried out to choose candidates that are secreted into the culture medium after transfection of plasmids from the shuffled library into cells in tissue culture.

Clones that encode a secreted protein are then tested for immunogenicity in mice either as a DNA vaccine or as a protein antigen, as described above. Clones that give an improved induction of antibodies to the heterologous epitopes are chosen for further rounds of DNA shuffling. The process is continued until the immunogenicity of the heterologous epitope is sufficient for use as a vaccine against the pathogen from which the heterologous epitopes were derived.

2. Class I epitopes

MHC Class I epitopes are relatively short, linear peptide sequences that are generally between 6 and 12 amino acids amino acids in length, most often 9 amino acids in length. These epitopes are processed by antigen-presenting cells either after synthesis of the epitope within the cell (usually as part of a larger protein) or after uptake of soluble protein by the cells.

Polynucleotide sequences that encode one or more class I epitopes are inserted into the sequence of a hepadnavirus envelope gene either by replacing certain envelope sequences, or by inserting the epitope sequences into the envelope gene. This is typically done by modifying the gene before DNA shuffling or by including in the shuffling reaction certain oligonucleotide fragments that encode the heterologous epitopes as well as sufficient flanking hepadnavirus sequences to be incorporated into the shuffled products.

Preferably, the heterologous class I epitopes are placed into different positions in the several hepadnavirus genes used for the DNA shuffling reaction. This will optimize the chances for finding chimeric gene carrying the epitopes in an optimal position for efficient presentation.

3. Class II epitopes

MHC Class II epitopes are generally required to be part of a protein which is taken up by antigen presenting cells, rather than synthesized within the cell. Preferably, such epitopes are incorporated into a carrier protein such as the HBV envelope that can be produced in a soluble form or which can be secreted if the gene is delivered in the form of a DNA vaccine.

Polynucleotides that encode heterologous class II epitopes are inserted into regions of the hepadnavirus envelope genes that are not involved in the transmembrane structure of the protein. DNA shuffling is performed to obtain a secreted protein that also carries the class II epitopes. When injected as a protein, or when the gene is delivered as a DNA vaccine, the protein can be taken up by antigen presenting cells for processing of the class II epitopes.

Example 10

Evolution of Broad Spectrum Vaccines Against Hepatitis C Virus

Antigenic heterogeneity of different strains of Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) is a major problem in development of efficient vaccines against HCV. Antibodies or CTLs specific for one strain of HCV typically do not protects against other strains. Multivalent vaccine antigens that simultaneously protect against several strains of HCV would be of major importance when developing efficient vaccines against HCV.

The HCV envelope genes, which encode envelope proteins E1 and E2, have been shown to induce both antibody and lymphoproliferative responses against these antigens (Lee et al. (1998) J. Virol. 72: 8430-6), and these responses can be optimized by DNA shuffling. The hypervariable region 1 (HVR1) of the envelope protein E2 of HCV is the most variable antigenic fragment in the whole viral genome and is primarily responsible for the large inter- and intra-individual heterogeneity of the infecting virus (Puntoriero et al. (1998) EMBO J. 17: 3521-33). Therefore, the gene encoding E2 is a particularly useful target for evolution by DNA shuffling.

DNA shuffling of HCV antigens, such as nucleocapsid or envelope proteins E1, E2, provides a means to generate multivalent HCV vaccines that simultaneously protect against several strains of HCV. These antigens are shuffled using the family DNA shuffling approach. The starting genes will be obtained from various natural isolates of HCV. In addition, related genes from other viruses can be used to increase the number of different recombinants that are generated. A library of related, chimeric variants of HCV antigens are then generated and this library will be screened for induction of widely crossreactive immune responses. The screening can be done directly in vivo by injecting individual variants into test animals, such as mice or monkeys. Either purified recombinant proteins or DNA vaccines encoding the relevant genes are injected. Typically, a booster injection is given 2-3 weeks after the first injection. Thereafter, the sera of the test animals are collected and these sera are tested for the presence of antibodies that react against multiple HCV virus isolates.

Before the in vivo testing is initiated, the antigens can be pre-enriched in vitro for antigens that are recognized by polyclonal antisera derived from previously infected patients or test animals. Alternatively, monoclonal antibodies that are specific for various strains of HCV are used. The screening is performed using phage display or ELISA assays. For example, the antigen variants are expressed on bacteriophage M13 and the phage are then incubated on plates coated with antisera derived from patients or test animals infected with various HCV isolates. The phage that bind to the antibodies are then eluted and further analyzed in test animals for induction of crossreactive antibodies.

Example 11

Evolution of Chimeric Allergens that Induce Broad Immune Responses and Have Reduced Risk of Inducing Anaphylactic Reactions

Specific immunotherapy of allergy is performed by injecting increasing amounts of the given allergens into the patients. The therapy typically alters the types of allergen-specific immune responses from a dominating T helper 2 (T H 2) type response to a dominating T helper 1 (T H 1) type response. However, because allergic patients have increased levels of IgE antibodies specific for the allergens, the immunotherapy of allergy involves a risk of IgE receptor mediated anaphylactic reactions.

T helper (T H ) cells are capable of producing a large number of different cytokines, and based on their cytokine synthesis pattern T H cells are divided into two subsets (Paul and Seder (1994) Cell 76: 241-251). T H 1 cells produce high levels of IL-2 and IFN-gamma and no or minimal levels of IL-4, IL-5 and IL-13. In contrast, T H 2 cells produce high levels of IL-4, IL-5 and IL-13, whereas IL-2 and IFN-gamma production is minimal or absent. T H 1 cells activate macrophages, dendritic cells and augment the cytolytic activity of CD8+ cytotoxic T lymphocytes and NK cells (Id.), whereas T H 2 cells provide efficient help for B cells and they also mediate allergic responses due to the capacity of T H 2 cells to induce IgE isotype switching and differentiation of B cells into IgE secreting cell (De Vries and Punnonen (1996) In Cytokine regulation of humoral immunity: basic and clinical aspects. Eds. Snapper, C. M., John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., West Sussex, UK, pp. 195-216.

This Example describes methods to generate chimeric allergens that can broadly modulate allergic immune responses. This can be achieved by DNA shuffling of related allergen genes to generate chimeric genes. In addition, chimeric/mutated allergens are less likely to be recognized by preexisting IgE antibodies of the patients. Importantly, allergen variants that are not recognized by IgE antibodies can be selected using patients sera and negative selection (FIG. 13 ).

As one example, chimeric allergen variants of Der p2, Der f2, Tyr p2 Lep d2 and Gly d2 allergens are generated. These house dust mite allergens are very common in exacerbating allergic and asthmatic symptoms, and improved means to downregulate such allergic immune responses are desired. House dust mites can be used as sources of the genes. The corresponding genes are shuffled using family DNA shuffling and a shuffled library is generated. Phage display is used to exclude allergens that are recognized by antibodies from allergic individuals. It is particularly important is to exclude variants that are recognized by IgE antibodies. Phage expressing the allergen variants are incubated with pools of sera derived from allergic individuals. The phage that are recognized by IgE antibodies are removed, and the remaining allergens are further tested in vitro and in vivo for their capacity to activate allergen-specific human T cells (FIG. 14 ). Because immunotherapy of allergy is believed to function through induction of a dominating T H 1 response as compared to allergic T H 2 response, efficient T cell activation and induction of a T H 1 type response by allergen variants is used as a measure of the efficacy of the allergens to modulate allergic T cell responses.

The optimal allergen variants are then further tested in vivo by studying skin responses after injections to the skin. A strong inflammatory response around the injection site is an indication of efficient T cell activation, and the allergen variants that induce the most efficient delayed type T cell response (typically observed 24 hours after the injection) are the best candidates for further studies in vivo to identify allergens that effectively downregulate allergic immune responses. Accordingly, these allergen variants re analyzed for their capacity to inhibit allergic responses in allergic, atopic and asthmatic individuals. The screening of allergen variants is further illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 .

Example 12

Evolution of Cancer Antigens that Induce Efficient Anti-tumor Immune Responses

Several cancer cells express antigens that are present at significantly higher levels on the malignant cells than on other cells in the body. Such antigens provide excellent targets for preventive cancer vaccines and immunotherapy of cancer. The immunogenicity of such antigens can be improved by DNA shuffling. In addition, DNA shuffling provides means to improve expression levels of cancer antigens.

This Example describes methods to generate cancer antigens that can efficiently induce anti-tumor immune responses by DNA shuffling of related cancer antigen genes. Libraries of shuffled melanoma-associated glycoprotein (gp100/pmel17) genes (Huang et al. (1998) J. Invest. Dermatol. 111: 662-7) are generated. The genes can be isolated from melanoma cells obtained from various patients, who may have mutations of the gene, increasing the diversity in the starting genes. In addition, a gp100 gene can be isolated from other mammalian species to further increase the diversity of starting genes. A typical method for the isolation of the genes is RT-PCR. The corresponding genes are shuffled using single gene DNA shuffling or family DNA shuffling and a shuffled library is generated.

The shuffled gp100 variants, either pools or individual clones, are subsequently injected into test animals, and the immune responses are studied (FIG. 15 ). The shuffled antigens are either expressed in E. coli and recombinant, purified proteins are injected, or the antigen genes are used as components of DNA vaccines. The immune response can be analyzed for example by measuring anti-gp100 antibodies, as previous studies indicate that the antigen can induce specific antibody responses (Huang et al., supra.). Alternatively, the test animals that can be challenged by malignant cells expressing gp100. Animals that have been efficiently immunized will generate cytotoxic T cells specific for gp100 and will survive the challenge, whereas in non-immunized or poorly immunized animals the malignant cells will efficiently grow eventually resulting in lethal expansion of the cells. Furthermore, antigens that induce cytotoxic T cells that have the capacity to kill cancer cells can be identified by measuring the capacity of T cells derived from immunized animals to kill cancer cells in vitro. Typically the cancer cells are first labeled with radioactive isotopes and the release of radioactivity is an indication of tumor cell killing after incubation in the presence of T cells from immunized animals. Such cytotoxicity assays are known in the art.

The antigens that induce highest levels of specific antibodies and/or can protect against the highest number of malignant cells can be chosen for additional rounds of shuffling and screening. Mice are useful test animals because large numbers of antigens can be studied. However, monkeys are a preferred test animal, because the MHC molecules of monkeys are very similar to those of humans.

To screen for antigens that have optimal capacity to activate antigen-specific T cells, peripheral blood mononuclear cells from previously infected or immunized humans individuals can be used. This is a particularly useful method, because the MHC molecules that will present the antigenic peptides are human MHC molecules. Shuffled cancer antigens that induce cytotoxic T cells that have the capacity to kill cancer cells can be identified by measuring the capacity of T cells derived from immunized animals to kill cancer cells in vitro. Typically the cancer cells are first labeled with radioactive isotopes and the release of radioactivity is an indication of tumor cell killing after incubation in the presence of T cells from immunized animals. Such cytotoxicity assays are known in the art.

Example 13

Evolution of Autoantigens that Induce Efficient Immune Responses

Autoimmune diseases are characterized by an immune response directed against self antigens expressed by the host. Autoimmune responses are generally mediated by T H 1 cells that produce high levels of IL-2 and IFN-gamma. Vaccines that can direct autoantigen specific T cells towards T H 2 phenotype producing increased levels of IL-4 and IL-5 would be beneficial. For such vaccines to work, the vaccine antigens have to be able to efficiently activate specific T cells. DNA shuffling can be used to generate antigens that have such properties. To optimally induce T H 2 cell differentiation it may be beneficial to coadminister cytokines that have been shown to enhance T H 2 cell activation and differentiation, such as IL-4 (Racke et al. (1994) J. Exp. Med. 180: 1961-66).

This Example describes methods for generating autoantigens that can efficiently induce immune responses. DNA shuffling is performed on related autoantigen genes. For example, libraries of shuffled myelin basic proteins, or fragments thereof (Zamvil and Steinman (1990) Ann. Rev. Immunol. 8: 579-621); Brocke et al. (1996) Nature 379: 343-46) are generated. MBP is considered to be an important autoantigen in patients with multiple sclerosis (MS). The genes encoding MBP from at least bovine, mouse, rat, guinea pig and human have been isolated providing an excellent starting point for family shuffling. A typical method for the isolation of the genes is RT-PCR. The shuffled MBP variants, either pools or individual clones, are subsequently injected into test animals, and the immune responses are studied. The shuffled antigens are either expressed in E. coli and recombinant, purified proteins are injected, or the antigen genes are used as components of DNA vaccines or viral vectors. The immune response can be analyzed for example by measuring anti-MBP antibodies by ELISA. Alternatively, the lymphocytes derived from immunized test animals are activated with MBP, and the T cell proliferation or cytokine synthesis is studies. A sensitive assays for cytokine synthesis is ELISPOT (McCutcheon et al. (1997) J. Immunol. Methods 210: 149-66). Mice are useful test animals because large numbers of antigens can be studied. However, monkeys are a preferred test animal, because the MHC molecules of monkeys are very similar to those of humans.

To screen for antigens that have optimal capacity to activate MBP specific T cells peripheral blood mononuclear cells from patients with MS can also be used. This is a particularly useful method, because the MHC molecules that will present the antigenic peptides are human MHC molecules. Shuffled antigens that activate MBP specific T cells can be identified by measuring the capacity of T cells derived from MS patients to proliferate or produce cytokines upon culture in the presence of the antigen variants. Such assays are known in the art. One such assay is ELISPOT (McCutcheon et al., supra.). An indication of the efficacy of an MBP variant to activate specific T cells is also the degree of skin inflammation when the antigen is injected into the skin of a patient with MS. Strong inflammation is correlated with strong activation of antigen-specific T cells. Improved activation of MBP specific T cells, particularly in the presence of IL-4, is likely to result in enhanced T H 2 cell responses, which are beneficial in the treatment of MS patients.

Example 14

Method of Optimizing the Immunogenicity of Hepatitis B Surface Antigen

This Example describes methods by which the envelope protein sequence of the hepatitis B virus can be evolved to provide a more immunogenic surface antigen. Such a protein is important for vaccination of low responders and for immunotherapy of chronic hepatitis B.

Background

Current HBV vaccines (Merck, SKB) are based on the immunogenicity of the viral envelope protein and contain the Major (or Small) form of the envelope protein produced as particles in yeast. These particles induce antibodies to the major surface antigen (HBsAg) which can protect against infection when antibody levels are at least 10 milli-International Units per milliliter (mU/ml). These recombinant protein preparations are not capable of inducing humoral immunity in chronic carriers (some 300 million cases worldwide) the induction of which would be important to control virus spread. Moreover, certain individuals respond poorly to the vaccine (up to 30-50% of vaccinees in some groups) and do not develop protective levels of antibody. The inclusion of the natural epitope sequences contained in the Middle or Large forms of the viral envelope protein has been used as a method to increase the immunogenicity of vaccine preparations. An alternative method is to introduce new (i.e., not present in the natural virus sequence) helper T-cell epitopes into the HBsAg sequence using DNA shuffling technology.

Method

DNA sequences of HBsAg from different subtypes of HBV (e.g., ayw and adr) and the related woodchuck hepatitis virus are prepared for shuffling. Comparison of the genes encoding these proteins suggests that recombination would occur at least ten times within 850 base pairs when shuffling the ayw and woodchuck hepatitis virus (WHV) DNA sequences. Nucleotide and amino acid sequences of portions of different subtypes of HBV are shown in FIG. 17 .

The sequence of the main HBsAg B-cell antigenic site (the “a” epitope) can be retained in the protein sequence by including the coding sequences of the external “a” loop in the final protein preparation. Peptide analogue(s) for the “a” epitope of HBsAg have been described (Neurath et al. (1984) J. Virol. Methods 9:341-346), and the immunogenicity of the “a” epitope has been demonstrated (Bhatnagar et al. (1982) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 79: 4400-4404). HBsAg and WHsAg share the major “a” determinant, and chimps can be protected by both antigens (Cote et al. (1986) J. Virol. 60: 895-901). Likewise, important CTL epitopes can be included in the protein in a defined way.

One can also easily introduce B or T (helper or CTL) epitopes from other antigens into the shuffled HBsAg sequence. This may focus the immune response to certain epitopes, independent of other potentially dominant epitopes from the same protein. Furthermore, the availability of the “a” loop on the HBsAg may provide a region of the envelope protein into which other artificial antigens or mimotopes could be included.

In all cases where a novel HBV envelope sequence is prepared to include a specific epitope (from HBV, another pathogen or a tumor cell), shuffling of the surrounding sequences in the HBV envelope will serve to optimize expression of the protein and help to ensure that the immune response is directed to the desired epitope.

Several methods of analyzing and utilizing shuffled HBsAg sequences are described below.

A. Modulating expression levels of HBsAg

Shuffled HBsAg sequences are introduced into cells in culture and the ability to direct expression of secreted HBsAg (measured with clinical kits for HBsAg expression) is evaluated. This can be used to identify shuffled HBsAg sequences which exhibit optimized HBsAg expression levels. Such coding sequences are particularly interesting for DNA vaccination.

B. Circumventing low responsiveness to the HBsAg

Shuffled HBsAg sequences are evaluated for their ability to induce an immune response to the clinically relevant HBsAg epitopes. This can be done using mice of the H-2s and H-2f haplotypes, which respond poorly or not at all to HBsAg protein immunization. In these experiments, one can verify that antibodies are generated to the main “a” epitope in the S protein, and a second protective epitope in the PreS2 region (a linear sequence).

The PreS2 and S coding sequences for the envelope protein (HBsAg) from the HBV ayw subtype (plasmid pCAG-M-Kan; Whalen) and the WHV (plasmid pWHV8 from ATCC) are amplified from the two plasmids by PCR and shuffled. Examples of suitable primers for PCR amplification are shown in FIG. 18 . The shuffled library of sequences is cloned into an HBsAg-expression vector and individual colonies are chosen for preparation of plasmid DNA. The DNA is administered to the test animals and vectors which induce the desired immune response are identified and recovered.

C. Presentation of natural HBsAg CTL epitopes by evolved HBsAg proteins

This example describes methods of using the evolved HBsAg protein to present natural HBsAg CTL epitopes. Shuffling is used to increase overall immunogenicity of the HBsAg protein, as discussed above. However, some of the evolved HBsAg sequences are replaced with class I or class II epitope sequences from the natural HBsAg protein in order to stimulate immunoreactivity specifically to these natural viral epitopes. Alternatively, the natural viral epitopes can be added to the evolved protein without loss of immunogenicity of the evolved HBsAg.

D. Expression of tumor-derived CTL epitopes by evolved HBsAg proteins

This example describes methods of using the evolved HBsAg protein is used to express tumor-derived CTL epitopes. The overall immunogenicity of the HBsAg protein is increased by shuffling. However, some of the evolved HBsAg sequences are replaced with class I or class II epitope sequences from tumor cells in order to stimulate immunoreactivity specifically to these natural viral epitopes. Alternatively, the tumor cells epitopes can be added to the evolved protein without loss of immunogenicity of the evolved HBsAg.

E. Expression of mimotope sequences by the HBsAg

This example describes the use of an evolved HBsAg protein for expression of mimotope sequences. Again, the evolved HBsAg protein is used to increase overall immunogenicity of the protein. However, some of the evolved HBsAg sequences are replaced with mimotope sequences to stimulate immunoreactivity specifically to the natural sequence which cross reacts with the mimotope. Alternatively, the mimotope sequences can be added to the evolved protein without loss of immunogenicity of the evolved HBsAg.

Example 15

Fusion Proteins of the HBsAg Polypeptide and HIV gp120 Proteins

This Example describes the preparation of fusion proteins (“chimeras”) formed from the HBsAg polypeptide and the extracellular fragment gp120 of the HIV envelope protein, and their use as vaccines.

Background

When used as a vaccine, recombinant monomeric gp120 has failed to induce antibodies that have strong neutralizing activity with primary isolates of the HIV virus. It has been suggested that oligomeric forms of the HIV envelope protein which expose certain regions of the tertiary structure would be better able to elicit virus-neutralizing antibodies (Parrin et al. (1997) Immunol. Lett. 57: 105-112; VanCott et al. (1997) J. Virol. 71: 4319-4330;

In this Example, DNA shuffling is applied to this problem, in order to obtain gp120 polypeptides which adopt conformations slightly different from those of previous preparations of recombinant gp120. To allow the individual gp120 molecules to interact as oligomers, a fusion is prepared between gp120 sequences (on the N-terminus of the fusion) and HBsAg sequences (on the C-terminal of the fusion).

The N-terminal peptide sequence of the S region of the HBsAg polypeptide is a transmembrane structure which is locked into the membrane of the endoplasmic reticulum. The actual N-terminus of the S region as well as the preS2 sequences are located in the lumenal part of the ER. They are found on the outside of the final HBsAg particles. By placing the gp120 sequences on the N-terminus of the HBsAg preS2 or S sequences, the gp120 sequences are also located on the outside of the particles. The gp120 molecules can thus be brought together in three-dimensional space to interact as in the virus.

Since the exact conformation of the final chimera which will have the most appropriate immunogenicity cannot be predicted, DNA shuffling is employed. The sequences of the HBsAg polypeptide, which functions as a scaffold, and of gp120 are both shuffled. Screening of the shuffled products can be performed by ELISA assay using antibodies (polyclonal or monoclonal) which have previously been determined to have virus neutralizing activity.

Method

The sequences encoding the gp120 fragment of the HIV envelope protein are preferably prepared as a synthetic gene to include codons which are optimal for gene expression in mammals. The gp120 sequence will typically include a signal sequence on its N-terminal end.

The gp120 sequences are inserted into the preS2 region of an HBsAg-expressing plasmid. In the preS2 region of the plasmid pMKan and its derivatives, an EcoRI site and an XhoI site are available for cloning. The gp120 sequences can be inserted between these two sites, which brings the gp120 closer to the start of the S coding sequences, or into the EcoRI site alone, which leaves a spacer sequence of about 50 amino acids between the gp120 sequence and the start of the S region of the HBsAg. These two different cloning strategies will give rise to chimeric molecules in which the gp120 sequences are located at different distances from the transmembrane region of the HBsAg sequence. This may be advantageous in allowing the gp120 sequences to adopt conformations which are more suitable immunogens than monomeric gp120.

DNA shuffling of the entire chimeric sequence is carried out. Family shuffling is preferred; this involves the preparation of several gp120-HBsAg fusion proteins in which different gp120 and HBsAg (or WHV) sequences are used. An alignment of HBsAg nucleotide sequences is shown in FIG. 19 . After shuffling of the different sequences, the products are cloned into an expression vector such as pMKan. Pools of clones from the library of shuffled products are transfected into cultured cells and the secretion of chimeric proteins is assayed with broadly reactive antibodies to gp120. Positive clones can be further evaluated with particular antibodies that have demonstrated HIV neutralizing activity, for example the anti-CD4 binding domain recombinant human monoclonal antibody, IgG1b12 (Kessler et al. (1997) AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses, 1: 13: 575-582; Roben et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68: 4821-4828). Candidate clones can then be used to immunize mice and the antiserum obtained is evaluated for HIV virus-neutralizing activity in in vitro assays.

Because the gp120 molecule (approx. 1100 amino acids) is larger in size than the monomeric HBsAg preS2+S protein (282 amino acids), it is likely that not every HBsAg monomer in an aggregated particle will contain a gp120 sequence. Internal initiation of protein synthesis can take place on the HBsAg coding sequences at the initiator methionine that marks the beginning of the S region. Thus, the chimeric molecule (which contains the gp120 sequences) will be mixed in the cell with the S region and the multimeric particles should assemble with an appropriate number of chimeric polypeptides and native HBsAg S monomers. Alternatively, an S-expressing plasmid can be mixed with the plasmid expressing the chimera, or a single plasmid which expresses the chimera and the S form can be constructed. A diagram of the resulting particles is shown in FIG. 20 .

Example 16

DNA Shuffling of HSV-1 and HSV-2 Glycoproteins B and/or D as Means to Induce Enhanced Protective Immune Responses

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to obtain HSV glycoprotein B (gB) and glycoprotein D (gD) polypeptides that exhibit improved ability to induce protective immune responses upon administration to a mammal. Epidemiological studies have shown that prior infections with HSV-1 give partial protection against infections with HSV-2, indicating existence of cross-reactive immune responses. Based on previous vaccination studies, the main immunogenic glycoproteins in HSV appear to be gB and gD, which are encoded by 2.7 kb and 1.2 kb genes, respectively. The gB and gD genes of HSV-1 are about 85% identical to the corresponding gene of HSV-2, and the gB genes of each share little sequence identity with the gD genes. Baboon HSV-2 gB is appr. 75% identical to human HSV-1 or -2 gB, with rather long stretches of almost 90% identity. In addition, 60-75% identity is found in portions of the genes of equine and bovine herpesviruses.

Family shuffling is employed using as substrates nucleic acids that encode gB and/or gD from HSV-1 and HSV-2. Preferably, homologous genes are obtained from HSVs of various strains. An alignment of gD nucleotide sequences from HSV-1 and two strains of HSV-2 is shown in FIG. 7 . Antigens encoded by the shuffled nucleic acids are expressed and analyzed in vivo. For example, one can screen for improved induction of neutralizing antibodies and/or CTL responses against HSV-1/HSV-2. One can also detect protective immunity by challenging mice or guinea pigs with the viruses. Screening can be done using pools or individuals clones.

Example 17

Evolution of HIV Gp120 Proteins for Induction of Broad Spectrum Neutralizing Ab Responses

This Example describes the use of DNA shuffling to generate immunogens that crossreact among different strains of viruses, unlike the wild-type immunogens. Shuffling two kinds of envelope sequences can generate immunogens that induce neutralizing antibodies against a third strain.

Antibody-mediated neutralization of HIV-1 is strictly type-specific. Although neutralizing activity broadens in infected individuals over time, induction of such antibodies by vaccination has been shown to be extremely difficult. Antibody-mediated protection from HIV-1 infection in vivo correlates with antibody-mediated neutralization of virus in vitro.

FIG. 8 illustrates the generation of libraries of shuffled gp120 genes. gp120 genes derived from HIV-1DH12 and HIV1IIIB(NL43) are shuffled. The chimeric/mutant gp120 genes are then analyzed for their capacity to induce antibodies that have broad spectrum capacity to neutralize different strains of HIV. Individual shuffled gp120 genes are incorporated into genetic vaccine vectors, which are then introduced to mice by injection or topical application onto the skin. These antigens can also be delivered as purified recombinant proteins. The immune responses are measured by analyzing the capacity of the mouse sera to neutralize HIV growth in vitro. Neutralization assays are performed against HIV-1DH12, HIV-1IIIB and HIV-189.6. The chimeras/mutants that demonstrate broad spectrum neutralization are chosen for further rounds of shuffling and selection. Additional studies are performed in monkeys to illustrate the capacity of the shuffled gp120 genes to provide protection for subsequent infection with immunodeficiency virus.

It is understood that the examples and embodiments described herein are for illustrative purposes only and that various modifications or changes in light thereof will be suggested to persons skilled in the art and are to be included within the spirit and purview of this application and scope of the appended claims. All publications, patents, and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference for all purposes.

25 1 1185 DNA Herpes Simplex Virus 1 glycoprotein D-1 (gD-1) from Herpes Simplex Virus 1 (HSV-1) 1atggggggga ctgccgccag gttgggggcc gtgattttgt ttgtcgtcat agtgggcctc 60catggggtcc gcggcaaata tgccttggcg gatgcctctc tcaagatggc cgaccccaat 120cgctttcgcg gcaaagacct tccggtcctg gaccagctga ccgaccctcc gggggtccgg 180cgcgtgtacc acatccaggc gggcctaccg gacccgttcc agccccccag cctcccgatc 240acggtttact acgccgtgtt ggagcgcgcc tgccgcagcg tgctcctaaa cgcaccgtcg 300gaggcccccc agattgtccg cggggcctcc gaagacgtcc ggaaacaacc ctacaacctg 360accatcgctt ggtttcggat gggaggcaac tgtgctatcc ccatcacggt catggagtac 420accgaatgct cctacaacaa gtctctgggg gcctgtccca tccgaacgca gccccgctgg 480aactactatg acagcttcag cgccgtcagc gaggataacc tggggttcct gatgcacgcc 540cccgcgtttg agaccgccgg cacgtacctg cggctcgtga agataaacga ctggacggag 600attacacagt ttatcctgga gcaccgagcc aagggctcct gtaagtacgc cctcccgctg 660cgcatccccc cgtcagcctg cctctccccc caggcctacc agcagggggt gacggtggac 720agcatcggga tgctgccccg cttcatcccc gagaaccagc gcaccgtcgc cgtatacagc 780ttgaagatcg ccgggtggca cgggcccaag gccccataca cgagcaccct gctgcccccg 840gagctgtccg agacccccaa cgccacgcag ccagaactcg ccccggaaga ccccgaggat 900tcggccctct tggaggaccc cgtggggacg gtggcgccgc aaatcccacc aaactggcac 960atcccgtcga tccaggacgc cgcgacgcct taccatcccc cggccacccc gaacaacatg 1020ggcctgatcg ccggcgcggt gggcggcagt ctcctggcag ccctggtcat ttgcggaatt 1080gtgtactgga tgcaccgccg cactcggaaa gccccaaagc gcatacgcct cccccacatc 1140cgggaagacg accagccgtc ctcgcaccag cccttgtttt actag 1185 2 1180 DNA Herpes Simplex Virus 2 glycoprotein D-1 (gD-1) from Herpes Simplex Virus 2 (HSV-2) 2atggggcgtt tgacctccgg cgtcgggacg gcggccctgc tagttgtcgc ggtgggactc 60cgcgtcgtct gcgccaaata cgccttagca gacccctcgc ttaagatggc cgatcccaat 120cgatttcgcg ggaagaacct tccggttttg gaccagctga ccgacccccc cggggtgaag 180cgtgtttacc acattcagcc gagcctggag gacccgttcc agccccccag catcccgatc 240actgtgtact acgcagtgct ggaacgtgcc tgccgcagcg tgctcctaca tgccccatcg 300gaggcccccc agatcgtgcg cggggcttcg gacgaggccc gaaagcacac gtacaacctg 360accatcgcct ggtatcgcat gggagacaat tgcgctatcc ccatcacggt tatggaatac 420accgagtgcc cctacaacaa gtcgttgggg gtctgcccca tccgaacgca gccccgctgg 480agctactatg acagctttag cgccgtcagc gaggataacc tgggattcct gatgcacgcc 540cccgccttcg agaccgcggg tacgtacctg cggctagtga agataaacga ctggacggag 600atcacacaat ttatcctgga gcaccgggcc cgcgcctcct gcaagtacgc tctccccctg 660cgcatccccc cggcagcgtg cctcacctcg aaggcctacc aacagggcgt gacggtcgac 720agcatcggga tgttaccccg ctttactccc gaaaaccagc gcaccgtcgc cctatacagc 780ttaaaaatcg ccgggtggca cggccccaag cccccgtaca ccagcaccct gctgccgccg 840gagctgtccg acaccaccaa cgccacgcaa cccgaactcg ttccggaaga ccccgaggac 900tcggccctct tagaggatcc cgccgggacg gtgtcttcgc agatcccccc aaactggcac 960atcccgtcga tccaggacgt cgcgccgcac cacgcccccg ccgccccagc caacccgggc 1020ctgatcatcg gcgcgctggc cggcagtacc ctggcggcgc tggtcatcgg cggtattgcg 1080ttttgggtac gccgccggcg ctcagtggcc cccaagcgcc tacgtctccc ccacatccgg 1140gatgacgacg cgcccccctc gcaccagcca ttgttttact 1180 3 1242 DNA Herpes Simplex Virus 2 glycoprotein D-2 (gD-2) from Herpes Simplex Virus 2 (HSV-2) 3atggggcgtt tgacctccgg cgtcgggacg gcggccctgc tagttgtcgc ggtgggactc 60cgcgtcgtct gcgccaaata cgccttagca gacccctcgc ttaagatggc cgatcccaat 120cgatttcgcg ggaagaacct tccggttttg gaccagctga ccgacccccc cggggtgaag 180cgtgtttacc acattcagcc gagcctggag gacccgttcc agccccccag catcccgatc 240actgtgtact acgcagtgct ggaacgtgcc tgccgcagcg tgctcctaca tgccccatcg 300gaggcccccc agatcgtgcg cggggcttcg gacgaggccc gaaagcacac gtacaacctg 360accatcgcct ggtatcgcat gggagacaat tgcgctatcc ccatcacggt tatggaatac 420accgagtgcc cctacaacaa gtcgttgggg gtctgcccca tccgaacgca gccccgctgg 480agctactatg acagctttag cgccgtcagc gaggataacc tgggattcct catgcacgcc 540cccgccttcg agaccgcggg tacgtacctg cggctagtga agataaacga ctggacggag 600atcacacaat ttatcctgga gcaccgggcc cgcgcctcct gcaagtacgc tctccccctg 660cgcatccccc cggcagcgtg cctcacctcg aaggcctacc aacagggcgt gacggtcgac 720agcatcggga tgttaccccg ctttatcccc gaaaaccagc gcaccgtcgc cctatacagc 780ttaaaaatcg ccgggtggca cggccccaag cccccgtaca ccagcaccct gctgccgccg 840gagctgtccg acaccaccaa cgccacgcaa cccgaactcg ttccggaaga ccccgaggac 900tcggccctct tagaggatcc cgccgggacg gtgtcttcgc agatcccccc aaactggcac 960atcccgtcga tccaggacgt cgcgccgcac cacgcccccg ccgcccccag caacccgggc 1020ctgatcatcg gcgcgctggc cggcagtacc ctggcggcgc tggtcatcgg cggtattgcg 1080ttttgggtac gccgccgcgc tcagatggcc cccaagcgcc tacgtctccc ccacatccgg 1140gatgacgacg cgcccccctc gcaccagcca ttgttttact agaggagttt ccccgttccc 1200gtgtacctct gggcccgtgt gggagggtgg ccggggtatt tg 1242 4 31 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceprimer 6025F 4caagcttctc tatcaaagca gtaagtagta c 31 5 25 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceprimer 7773R 5cttcctgctg ctcccaagaa cccaa 25 6 25 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceprimer 6196F 6atagaaagag cagaagacag tggca 25 7 25 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceprimer 7746R 7aacaaagctc ctattcccac tgctc 25 8 32 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceprimer BssH2-6205F 8ttggcgcgca gaagacagtg gcaatgagag tg 32 9 846 DNA Hepatitis B virus CDS (1)..(846) PreS2-S coding region of hepatitis B virus adr surface antigen (HBsAg) 9atg cag tgg aac tcc aca aca ttc cac caa gct ctg cta gac ccc aga 48Met Gln Trp Asn Ser Thr Thr Phe His Gln Ala Leu Leu Asp Pro Arg 1 5 10 15gtg agg ggc cta tac ttt cct gct ggt ggc tcc agt tcc gga aca gta 96Val Arg Gly Leu Tyr Phe Pro Ala Gly Gly Ser Ser Ser Gly Thr Val 20 25 30aac cct gtt ccg act act gcc tca ccc ata tcg tca atc ttc tcg agg 144Asn Pro Val Pro Thr Thr Ala Ser Pro Ile Ser Ser Ile Phe Ser Arg 35 40 45act ggg gac cct gca ccg aac atg gag aac aca aca tca gga ttc cta 192Thr Gly Asp Pro Ala Pro Asn Met Glu Asn Thr Thr Ser Gly Phe Leu 50 55 60gga ccc ctg ctc gtg tta cag gcg ggg ttt ttc ttg ttg aca aga atc 240Gly Pro Leu Leu Val Leu Gln Ala Gly Phe Phe Leu Leu Thr Arg Ile 65 70 75 80ctc aca ata cca cag agt cta cac tcg tgg tgg act tct ctc aat ttt 288Leu Thr Ile Pro Gln Ser Leu His Ser Trp Trp Thr Ser Leu Asn Phe 85 90 95cta ggg gca gca ccc acg tgt ctt ggc caa aat tcg cag tcc cca acc 336Leu Gly Ala Ala Pro Thr Cys Leu Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln Ser Pro Thr 100 105 110tcc aat cac tca cca acc tct tgt cct cca att tgt cct ggt tat cgt 384Ser Asn His Ser Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Ile Cys Pro Gly Tyr Arg 115 120 125tgg atg tgt ctg cgg cgt ttt atc ata ttc ctc ttc atc ctg ctg cta 432Trp Met Cys Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Phe Leu Phe Ile Leu Leu Leu 130 135 140tgc ctc atc ttc ttg ttg gtt ctt ctg gac tac caa ggt atg ttg tct 480Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Tyr Gln Gly Met Leu Ser145 150 155 160gtt tgt cct cta ctt cca aga aca tca act acc agc acg gga cca tgc 528Val Cys Pro Leu Leu Pro Arg Thr Ser Thr Thr Ser Thr Gly Pro Cys 165 170 175aag acc tgc acg att cct gct caa gga acc tct atg ttt ccc tct tct 576Lys Thr Cys Thr Ile Pro Ala Gln Gly Thr Ser Met Phe Pro Ser Ser 180 185 190tgc tgt aca aaa cct tcg gac gga aac tgc act tgt att ccc atc cca 624Cys Cys Thr Lys Pro Ser Asp Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Ile Pro Ile Pro 195 200 205tca tct tgg gct ttc gca aga ttc cta tgg gag tgg gcc tca gtc cgt 672Ser Ser Trp Ala Phe Ala Arg Phe Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Ser Val Arg 210 215 220ttc tcc tgg ctc agt tta cta gtg cca ttt gtt cag tgg ttc gta ggg 720Phe Ser Trp Leu Ser Leu Leu Val Pro Phe Val Gln Trp Phe Val Gly225 230 235 240ctt tcc ccc act gtt tgg ctt tca gtt ata tgg atg atg tgg tat tgg 768Leu Ser Pro Thr Val Trp Leu Ser Val Ile Trp Met Met Trp Tyr Trp 245 250 255ggg cca agt ctg tac aac atc ttg agt ccc ttt tta cct cta tta cca 816Gly Pro Ser Leu Tyr Asn Ile Leu Ser Pro Phe Leu Pro Leu Leu Pro 260 265 270att ttc ttt tgt ctt tgg gta tac att tga 846Ile Phe Phe Cys Leu Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 10 281 PRT Hepatitis B virus 10Met Gln Trp Asn Ser Thr Thr Phe His Gln Ala Leu Leu Asp Pro Arg 1 5 10 15Val Arg Gly Leu Tyr Phe Pro Ala Gly Gly Ser Ser Ser Gly Thr Val 20 25 30Asn Pro Val Pro Thr Thr Ala Ser Pro Ile Ser Ser Ile Phe Ser Arg 35 40 45Thr Gly Asp Pro Ala Pro Asn Met Glu Asn Thr Thr Ser Gly Phe Leu 50 55 60Gly Pro Leu Leu Val Leu Gln Ala Gly Phe Phe Leu Leu Thr Arg Ile 65 70 75 80Leu Thr Ile Pro Gln Ser Leu His Ser Trp Trp Thr Ser Leu Asn Phe 85 90 95Leu Gly Ala Ala Pro Thr Cys Leu Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln Ser Pro Thr 100 105 110Ser Asn His Ser Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Ile Cys Pro Gly Tyr Arg 115 120 125Trp Met Cys Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Phe Leu Phe Ile Leu Leu Leu 130 135 140Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Tyr Gln Gly Met Leu Ser145 150 155 160Val Cys Pro Leu Leu Pro Arg Thr Ser Thr Thr Ser Thr Gly Pro Cys 165 170 175Lys Thr Cys Thr Ile Pro Ala Gln Gly Thr Ser Met Phe Pro Ser Ser 180 185 190Cys Cys Thr Lys Pro Ser Asp Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Ile Pro Ile Pro 195 200 205Ser Ser Trp Ala Phe Ala Arg Phe Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Ser Val Arg 210 215 220Phe Ser Trp Leu Ser Leu Leu Val Pro Phe Val Gln Trp Phe Val Gly225 230 235 240Leu Ser Pro Thr Val Trp Leu Ser Val Ile Trp Met Met Trp Tyr Trp 245 250 255Gly Pro Ser Leu Tyr Asn Ile Leu Ser Pro Phe Leu Pro Leu Leu Pro 260 265 270Ile Phe Phe Cys Leu Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 11 846 DNA Hepatitis B virus CDS (1)..(846) PreS2-S coding region of hepatitis B virus ayw surface antigen (HBsAg) 11atg cag tgg aat tcc aca acc ttc cac caa act ctg caa gat ccc aga 48Met Gln Trp Asn Ser Thr Thr Phe His Gln Thr Leu Gln Asp Pro Arg 1 5 10 15gtg aga ggc ctg tat ttc cct gct ggt ggc tcc agt tca gga aca gta 96Val Arg Gly Leu Tyr Phe Pro Ala Gly Gly Ser Ser Ser Gly Thr Val 20 25 30aac cct gtt ctg act act gcc tct ccc tta tcg tca atc ttc tcg agg 144Asn Pro Val Leu Thr Thr Ala Ser Pro Leu Ser Ser Ile Phe Ser Arg 35 40 45att ggg gac cct gcg ctg aac atg gag aac atc aca tca gga ttc cta 192Ile Gly Asp Pro Ala Leu Asn Met Glu Asn Ile Thr Ser Gly Phe Leu 50 55 60gga ccc ctt ctc gtg tta cag gcg ggg ttt ttc ttg ttg aca aga atc 240Gly Pro Leu Leu Val Leu Gln Ala Gly Phe Phe Leu Leu Thr Arg Ile 65 70 75 80ctc aca ata ccg cag agt cta gac tcg tgg tgg act tct ctc aat ttt 288Leu Thr Ile Pro Gln Ser Leu Asp Ser Trp Trp Thr Ser Leu Asn Phe 85 90 95cta ggg gga act acc gtg tgt ctt ggc caa aat tcg cag tcc cca acc 336Leu Gly Gly Thr Thr Val Cys Leu Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln Ser Pro Thr 100 105 110tcc aat cac tca cca acc tct tgt cct cca act tgt cct ggt tat cgc 384Ser Asn His Ser Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Thr Cys Pro Gly Tyr Arg 115 120 125tgg atg tgt ctg cgg cgt ttt atc atc ttc ctc ttc atc ctg ctg cta 432Trp Met Cys Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Phe Leu Phe Ile Leu Leu Leu 130 135 140tgc ctc atc ttc ttg ttg gtt ctt ctg gac tat caa ggt atg ttg ccc 480Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Tyr Gln Gly Met Leu Pro145 150 155 160gtt tgt cct cta att cca gga tcc tca aca acc agc acg gga cca tgc 528Val Cys Pro Leu Ile Pro Gly Ser Ser Thr Thr Ser Thr Gly Pro Cys 165 170 175cgg acc tgc atg act act gct caa gga acc tct atg tat ccc tcc tgt 576Arg Thr Cys Met Thr Thr Ala Gln Gly Thr Ser Met Tyr Pro Ser Cys 180 185 190tgc tgt acc aaa cct tcg gac gga aat tgc acc tgt att ccc atc cca 624Cys Cys Thr Lys Pro Ser Asp Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Ile Pro Ile Pro 195 200 205tca tcc tgg gct ttc gga aaa ttc cta tgg gag tgg gcc tca gcc cgt 672Ser Ser Trp Ala Phe Gly Lys Phe Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Ser Ala Arg 210 215 220ttc tcc tgg ctc agt tta cta gtg cca ttt gtt cag tgg ttc gta ggg 720Phe Ser Trp Leu Ser Leu Leu Val Pro Phe Val Gln Trp Phe Val Gly225 230 235 240ctt tcc ccc act gtt tgg ctt tca gtt ata tgg atg atg tgg tat tgg 768Leu Ser Pro Thr Val Trp Leu Ser Val Ile Trp Met Met Trp Tyr Trp 245 250 255ggg cca agt ctg tac agc atc ttg agt ccc ttt tta ccg ctg tta cca 816Gly Pro Ser Leu Tyr Ser Ile Leu Ser Pro Phe Leu Pro Leu Leu Pro 260 265 270att ttc ttt tgt ctt tgg gta tac att taa 846Ile Phe Phe Cys Leu Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 12 281 PRT Hepatitis B virus 12Met Gln Trp Asn Ser Thr Thr Phe His Gln Thr Leu Gln Asp Pro Arg 1 5 10 15Val Arg Gly Leu Tyr Phe Pro Ala Gly Gly Ser Ser Ser Gly Thr Val 20 25 30Asn Pro Val Leu Thr Thr Ala Ser Pro Leu Ser Ser Ile Phe Ser Arg 35 40 45Ile Gly Asp Pro Ala Leu Asn Met Glu Asn Ile Thr Ser Gly Phe Leu 50 55 60Gly Pro Leu Leu Val Leu Gln Ala Gly Phe Phe Leu Leu Thr Arg Ile 65 70 75 80Leu Thr Ile Pro Gln Ser Leu Asp Ser Trp Trp Thr Ser Leu Asn Phe 85 90 95Leu Gly Gly Thr Thr Val Cys Leu Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln Ser Pro Thr 100 105 110Ser Asn His Ser Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Thr Cys Pro Gly Tyr Arg 115 120 125Trp Met Cys Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Phe Leu Phe Ile Leu Leu Leu 130 135 140Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Tyr Gln Gly Met Leu Pro145 150 155 160Val Cys Pro Leu Ile Pro Gly Ser Ser Thr Thr Ser Thr Gly Pro Cys 165 170 175Arg Thr Cys Met Thr Thr Ala Gln Gly Thr Ser Met Tyr Pro Ser Cys 180 185 190Cys Cys Thr Lys Pro Ser Asp Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Ile Pro Ile Pro 195 200 205Ser Ser Trp Ala Phe Gly Lys Phe Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Ser Ala Arg 210 215 220Phe Ser Trp Leu Ser Leu Leu Val Pro Phe Val Gln Trp Phe Val Gly225 230 235 240Leu Ser Pro Thr Val Trp Leu Ser Val Ile Trp Met Met Trp Tyr Trp 245 250 255Gly Pro Ser Leu Tyr Ser Ile Leu Ser Pro Phe Leu Pro Leu Leu Pro 260 265 270Ile Phe Phe Cys Leu Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 13 40 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceforward HBV ayw PCR primer 13ccgggaattc ctcgacacca tgcagtggaa ttccacaacc 40 14 39 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequencereverse HBV ayw PCR primer 14ccggggtacc caaagacaaa agaaaattgg taacagcgg 39 15 849 DNA Woodchuck hepatitis B virus CDS (1)..(849) Woodchuck hepatitis B virus (WHV8) surface antigen 15atg aaa aat cag act ttt cat ctc cag ggg ttc gta gac gga tta cga 48Met Lys Asn Gln Thr Phe His Leu Gln Gly Phe Val Asp Gly Leu Arg 1 5 10 15gac ttg aca aca acg gaa cgc caa cac aat gcc tat gga gat cct ttt 96Asp Leu Thr Thr Thr Glu Arg Gln His Asn Ala Tyr Gly Asp Pro Phe 20 25 30aca aca cta agc cct gcg gtt cct act gta tcc acc ata ttg tct cct 144Thr Thr Leu Ser Pro Ala Val Pro Thr Val Ser Thr Ile Leu Ser Pro 35 40 45ccc tcg acg act ggg gac cct gca ctg tca ccg gag atg tca cca tca 192Pro Ser Thr Thr Gly Asp Pro Ala Leu Ser Pro Glu Met Ser Pro Ser 50 55 60agt ctc cta gga ctc ctc gca gga tta cag gtg gtg tat ttc ttg tgg 240Ser Leu Leu Gly Leu Leu Ala Gly Leu Gln Val Val Tyr Phe Leu Trp 65 70 75 80aca aaa atc cta aca ata gct cag aat cta gat tgg tgg tgg act tct 288Thr Lys Ile Leu Thr Ile Ala Gln Asn Leu Asp Trp Trp Trp Thr Ser 85 90 95ctc agt ttt cca ggg ggc ata cca gag tgc act ggc caa aat tcg cag 336Leu Ser Phe Pro Gly Gly Ile Pro Glu Cys Thr Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln 100 105 110ttc caa act tgc aaa cac ttg cca acc tcc tgt cca cca act tgc aat 384Phe Gln Thr Cys Lys His Leu Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Thr Cys Asn 115 120 125ggc ttt cgt tgg atg tat ctg cgg cgt ttt atc ata tac cta tta gtc 432Gly Phe Arg Trp Met Tyr Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Tyr Leu Leu Val 130 135 140ctg ctg ctg tgc ctc atc ttc ttg ttg gtt ctc ctg gac tgg aaa ggt 480Leu Leu Leu Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Trp Lys Gly145 150 155 160tta ata cct gtc tgt cct ctt caa ccc aca aca gaa aca aca gtc aat 528Leu Ile Pro Val Cys Pro Leu Gln Pro Thr Thr Glu Thr Thr Val Asn 165 170 175tgc aga caa tgc aca atc tct gca caa gac atg tat act cct cct tac 576Cys Arg Gln Cys Thr Ile Ser Ala Gln Asp Met Tyr Thr Pro Pro Tyr 180 185 190tgt tgt tgt tta aaa cct acg gca gga aat tgc act tgt tgg ccc atc 624Cys Cys Cys Leu Lys Pro Thr Ala Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Trp Pro Ile 195 200 205cct tca tca tgg gct tta gga aat tac cta tgg gag tgg gcc tta gcc 672Pro Ser Ser Trp Ala Leu Gly Asn Tyr Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Leu Ala 210 215 220cgt ttc tct tgg ctc aat tta cta gtg ccc ttg ctt caa tgg tta gga 720Arg Phe Ser Trp Leu Asn Leu Leu Val Pro Leu Leu Gln Trp Leu Gly225 230 235 240gga att tcc ctc att gcg tgg ttt ttg ctt ata tgg atg att tgg ttt 768Gly Ile Ser Leu Ile Ala Trp Phe Leu Leu Ile Trp Met Ile Trp Phe 245 250 255tgg ggg ccc gca ctt ctg agc atc tta ccg cca ttt att ccc ata ttt 816Trp Gly Pro Ala Leu Leu Ser Ile Leu Pro Pro Phe Ile Pro Ile Phe 260 265 270gtt ctg ttt ttc ttg att tgg gta tac att tga 849Val Leu Phe Phe Leu Ile Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 16 282 PRT Woodchuck hepatitis B virus 16Met Lys Asn Gln Thr Phe His Leu Gln Gly Phe Val Asp Gly Leu Arg 1 5 10 15Asp Leu Thr Thr Thr Glu Arg Gln His Asn Ala Tyr Gly Asp Pro Phe 20 25 30Thr Thr Leu Ser Pro Ala Val Pro Thr Val Ser Thr Ile Leu Ser Pro 35 40 45Pro Ser Thr Thr Gly Asp Pro Ala Leu Ser Pro Glu Met Ser Pro Ser 50 55 60Ser Leu Leu Gly Leu Leu Ala Gly Leu Gln Val Val Tyr Phe Leu Trp 65 70 75 80Thr Lys Ile Leu Thr Ile Ala Gln Asn Leu Asp Trp Trp Trp Thr Ser 85 90 95Leu Ser Phe Pro Gly Gly Ile Pro Glu Cys Thr Gly Gln Asn Ser Gln 100 105 110Phe Gln Thr Cys Lys His Leu Pro Thr Ser Cys Pro Pro Thr Cys Asn 115 120 125Gly Phe Arg Trp Met Tyr Leu Arg Arg Phe Ile Ile Tyr Leu Leu Val 130 135 140Leu Leu Leu Cys Leu Ile Phe Leu Leu Val Leu Leu Asp Trp Lys Gly145 150 155 160Leu Ile Pro Val Cys Pro Leu Gln Pro Thr Thr Glu Thr Thr Val Asn 165 170 175Cys Arg Gln Cys Thr Ile Ser Ala Gln Asp Met Tyr Thr Pro Pro Tyr 180 185 190Cys Cys Cys Leu Lys Pro Thr Ala Gly Asn Cys Thr Cys Trp Pro Ile 195 200 205Pro Ser Ser Trp Ala Leu Gly Asn Tyr Leu Trp Glu Trp Ala Leu Ala 210 215 220Arg Phe Ser Trp Leu Asn Leu Leu Val Pro Leu Leu Gln Trp Leu Gly225 230 235 240Gly Ile Ser Leu Ile Ala Trp Phe Leu Leu Ile Trp Met Ile Trp Phe 245 250 255Trp Gly Pro Ala Leu Leu Ser Ile Leu Pro Pro Phe Ile Pro Ile Phe 260 265 270Val Leu Phe Phe Leu Ile Trp Val Tyr Ile 275 280 17 40 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequenceforward WHV PCR primer 17ccgggaattc tcatctccag gggttcgtag acggattacg 40 18 39 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial Sequencereverse WHV PCR primer 18ccggggtacc caaatcaaga aaaacagaac aaatatggg 39 19 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial SequenceAYWSHFOR primer 19gccggcagga aggaaatggg 20 20 23 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial SequenceAYWSHREV primer 20ctgctattgt cttcccaatc ctc 23 21 22 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial SequenceWHVSHFOR primer 21cgggacatac cacgtggttt ag 22 22 22 DNA Artificial Sequence Description of Artificial SequenceWHVSHREV primer 22ggcattaaag cagcgtatcc ac 22 23 16 PRT Plasmodium berghei PEPTIDE (1)..(16) circumsporozoite (CS) protein-based B-epitope 23Pro Pro Pro Pro Asn Pro Asn Asp Pro Pro Pro Pro Asn Pro Asn Asp 1 5 10 15 24 20 PRT Plasmodium yoelii PEPTIDE (1)..(20) circumsporozoite (CS) protein-based B-epitope 24Gln Gly Pro Gly Ala Pro Gln Gly Pro Gly Ala Pro Gln Gly Pro Gly 1 5 10 15Ala Pro Gln Gly 20 25 12 PRT Plasmodium berghei PEPTIDE (1)..(12) T-helper epitope 25Lys Gln Ile Arg Asp Ser Ile Thr Glu Glu Trp Ser 1 5 10

Claims

1. A recombinant antigen library comprising recombinant nucleic acids that encode antigenic polypeptides, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide comprising multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a first antigenic polypeptide of at least a first flavivirus or alphavirus and multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a second antigenic polypeptide of at least a second flavivirus or alphavirus, each subsequence being positioned relative to its position in the respective antigenic polypeptide, said at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide inducing an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

2. A method of obtaining at least one polynucleotide that encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against different antigenic polypeptides, the method comprising:(1) recombining at least first and second nucleic acids, the first nucleic acid encoding at least a first antigenic polypeptide of a first flavivirus or alphavirus and the second nucleic acid encoding at least a second antigenic polypeptide of a second flavivirus or alphavivirus, wherein at least the first and second nucleic acids differ from each other in two or more nucleotides, to produce a library of recombinant nucleic acids that encode recombinant antigenic polypeptides; and (2) screening the library for at least one recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide comprising multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least the first antigenic polypeptide and multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least the second antigenic polypeptide, each subsequence being positioned relative to its position in the respective antigenic polypeptide, which at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

3. The method of claim 2, wherein the method further comprises:(3) recombining at least one recombinant nucleic acid with a further nucleic acid, which is the same or different from at least the first and second nucleic acids, to produce a further library of recombinant nucleic acids; (4) screening the further library for at least one further recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one further recombinant antigenic polypeptide comprising multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least the first antigenic polypeptide and multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least the second antigenic polypeptide, each subsequence being positioned relative to its position in the respective antigenic polypeptide, which at least one further recombinant antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides; and (5) repeating (3) and (4), as necessary, to screen for at least one further recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one further recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

4. The method of claim 2, wherein at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides are of different serotypes of a flavivirus or alphavirus.

5. The method of claim 2, wherein at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides are different species or strains of a flavivirus or alphavirus.

6. The method of claim 2, wherein the screening is accomplished by:introducing into a test animal either: a) at least one recombinant nucleic acid of the library of recombinant nucleic acids, or b) at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide of the recombinant antigenic polypeptides encoded by the library of recombinant nucleic acids; introducing a flavivirus or alphavirus into the test animal; and determining whether the test animal is resistant to challenge by the flavivirus or alphavirus.

7. The method of claim 6, wherein the flavivirus or alphavirus introduced into the test animal is of a different serotype than the first flavivirus or alphavirus or the second flavivirus or alphavirus.

8. The method of claim 6, wherein the library is subdivided into a plurality of pools, each of which pools is introduced into a test animal to screen for pools that include at least one recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

9. The method of claim 8, wherein pools that include at least one recombinant nucleic acid are further subdivided into a plurality of subpools, each of which subpools is introduced into a test animal to screen for pools that include at least one recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

10. The method of claim 2, wherein the screening is accomplished by:expressing each recombinant nucleic acid of the library of recombinant nucleic acids in a phage display expression vector such that at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide encoded by a recombinant nucleic acid of the library is expressed as a fusion protein with a phage polypeptide that is displayed on a phage particle surface; contacting the phage with a first antibody that is specific for a first serotype of a flavivirus or alphavirus and selecting those phage that bind to the first antibody; and contacting those phage that bind to the first antibody with a second antibody that is specific for a second serotype of the flavivirus or alphavirus and selecting those phage that bind to the second antibody; wherein those phage that bind to the first antibody and the second antibody express a multivalent antigenic polypeptide.

11. The method of claim 10, wherein the screening further comprises contacting those phage that bind to the first and second antibodies with one or more additional antibodies, each of which is specific for an additional serotype of the flavivirus or alphavirus, and selecting those phage that bind to the respective additional antibodies.

12. The method of claim 10, wherein the phage display expression vector comprises a suppressible stop condon between the recombinant nucleic acid and nucleic acid encoding the phage polypeptide, whereby expression in a host cell which comprises a corresponding suppressor tRNA results in production of the fusion protein and expression in a host cell which lacks a corresponding suppressor tRNA results in production of the recombinant antigenic polypeptide not as a fusion protein.

13. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide exhibits an enhanced expression level in a host cell compared to the expression level of the first and second antigenic polypeptides in the host cell, and the screening is accomplished by expression of each recombinant nucleic acid in the host cell and subjecting the host cells to flow cytometry-based cell sorting to obtain those host cells that display at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide on the host cell surface.

14. The method of claim 2, wherein at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides are different serotypes, strains, or species of a flavivirus or alphavirus, and at least one recombinant nucleic acid encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces production of neutralizing antibodies against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

15. The method of claim 14, wherein at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide induces production of neutralizing antibodies against at least one additional serotype, strain, or species of flavivirus or alphavirus.

16. The method of claim 4, wherein the screening is accomplished by:introducing into a test animal either: a) at least one of the recombinant nucleic acid of the library of recombinant nucleic acids, or b) at least one of the recombinant antigenic polypeptides encoded by the library of recombinant nucleic acids; collecting serum from the test animal; and testing the serum for the presence of neutralizing antibodies against at least a first serotype of the flavivirus or alphavirus.

17. The method of claim 16, further comprising testing the serum for the presence of neutralizing antibodies against at least a second serotype of the flavivirus or alphavivirus that is different from the first serotype.

18. The method of claim 17, wherein each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides is a dengue virus antigen.

19. The method of claim 18, further comprising testing the serum for the presence of neutralizing antibodies against at least four different serotypes of dengue virus.

20. The method of claim 2, wherein (2) comprises screening the library for at least one recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one recombinant antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater that the immune response induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

21. The method of claim 2, wherein at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides are of a virus selected from the group consisting of an equine encephalitis virus or a related alphavirus, a virus of the Japanese encephalitis virus complex, a virus of the tick-borne encephalitis virus complex, a Dengue virus, a yellow fever virus, a St. Louis encephalitis virus, and a Murray Valley encephalitis virus.

22. The method of claim 20, wherein the flavivirus or alphavirus introduced into the test animal is of the same serotype as the first or second flavivirus or alphavirus.

23. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune induced by any one of the first and second antigenic polypeptides against any of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

24. The recombinant antigen library of claim 23, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces neutralizing antibodies against each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides.

25. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces neutralizing antibodies each of the at least first and second antigenic polypeptides.

26. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein each of the first and second antigenic polypeptides comprises an envelope protein, a premembrane protein, or both an envelope protein and premembrane protein.

27. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides are of a virus selected from the group consisting of an equine encephalitis virus or a related alphavirus, a virus of the Japanese encephalitis virus complex, a virus of the tick-bone encephalitis virus complex, a Dengue virus, a yellow fever virus, a St. Louis encephalitis virus, and a Murray Valley encephalitis virus.

28. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response that is cross reactive against at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides or first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses and against at least a third antigenic polypeptide of a flavivirus or alphavirus or against a third flavivirus or alphavirus.

29. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide comprises multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a third antigenic polypeptide of at least a third flavivirus or alphavirus.

30. The recombinant antigen library of claim 29, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response against each of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides against any other of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides.

31. The recombinant antigen library of claim 30, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response against each of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by any one of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides against any of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides.

32. The recombinant antigen library of claim 30, wherein the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides are different serotypes, strains, or species of a flavivirus or alphavirus.

33. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses that is greater than the immune response induced by the first antigenic polypeptide against the second flavivirus or alphavirus and the immune response induced by the second antigenic polypeptide against the first flavivirus or alphavirus.

34. The recombinant antigen library of claim 33, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses that is greater than the immune response induced by the first or second antigenic polypeptide against any of the first or second flavivirus or alphavirus.

35. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces neutralizing antibodies against one or more of the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses.

36. The recombinant antigen library of claim 35, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces neutralizing antibodies against each of the at least first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses.

37. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses are of different species, serotypes, or strains, and at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces neutralizing antibodies against one or more of the first and second antigenic polypeptides or one or more of the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses.

38. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces a neutralizing antibody response against at least three different serotypes, species or strains of flavivirus or alphavirus.

39. The recombinant antigen library of claim 38, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces a neutralizing antibody responses against at least four different viral serotypes, species or strains of flavivirus or alphavirus.

40. The recombinant antigen library of claim 29, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide further comprises multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a fourth antigenic polypeptide of at least a fourth flavivirus or alphavirus, each subsequence being positioned relative to its position in the respective antigenic polypeptide.

41. The recombinant antigen library of claim 40, wherein the first, second, third, and fourth flavivirus or alphaviruses are of different serotypes.

42. The recombinant antigen library of claim 40, wherein the first, second, third, and fourth flaviviruses or alphaviruses are dengue-1 virus, dengue-2 virus, dengue-3 virus, and dengue-4 virus, respectively.

43. The recombinant antigen library of claim 42, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces an immune response against each of a dengue-1 virus, dengue-2 virus, dengue-3 virus, and dengue-4 virus that is greater than:(i) the immune response induced by the first antigenic polypeptide against a dengue-2 virus, dengue-3 virus, or dengue-4 virus; (ii) the immune response induced by the second antigenic polypeptide against a dengue-1 virus, dengue-3 virus, or dengue-4 virus; (iii) the immune response induced by the third antigenic polypeptide against a dengue-1 virus, dengue-2 virus, or dengue-4 virus; and (iv) the immune response induced by the fourth antigenic polypeptide against a dengue-1 virus, dengue-2 virus, or dengue-3 virus.

44. A recombinant antigen library comprising recombinant nucleic acids that encode recombinant antigenic polypeptides, wherein the library comprises at least one recombinant nucleic acid that encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide comprising multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a first antigenic polypeptide of at least a first flavivirus or alphavirus, and multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a second antigenic polypeptide of at least a second flavivirus or alphavirus, each subsequence being positioned relative to its position in the respective antigenic polypeptide, said at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide inducing production of neutralizing antibodies against at least the first and second antigenic polypeptides or the first and second flaviviruses or alphaviruses.

45. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein at least one recombinant nucleic acid in the library encodes at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide that induces an immune response against each of the at least first and second antigenic polypeptides that is greater than the immune response induced by a combination of all of the at least first and second antigenic polypeptides against any of the at least first and second antigenic polypeptides.

46. The recombinant antigen library of claim 44, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide further comprises multiple non-contiguous subsequences of at least a third antigenic polypeptide of at least a third flavivirus or alphavirus.

47. The recombinant antigen library of claim 46, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces neutralizing antibodies against the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides or against the first, second, and third flaviviuses or alphaviruses.

48. The recombinant antigen library of claim 47, at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide further comprises multiple non-contiguous subsequences of a fourth antigenic polypeptide of a fourth flavivirus or alphavirus.

49. The recombinant antigen library of claim 48, wherein at least one recombinant multivalent antigenic polypeptide induces neutralizing antibodies against the first, second, third, and fourth polypeptides or against the first, second, third, or fourth flaviviruses or alphaviruses.

50. The recombinant antigen library of claim 46, wherein each of the first, second, and third antigenic polypeptides comprises an envelope protein, a premembrane protein, or an envelope protein and premembrane protein.

51. The recombinant antigen library of claim 1, wherein the library is obtained by recombining at least first and second nucleic acids, the at least first nucleic acid encoding at least a first antigenic polypeptide of at least a first flavivirus or alphavirus and the at least second nucleic acid encoding at least a second antigenic polypeptide of at least a second flavivirus or alphavirus, wherein the at least first and second nucleic acids differ from each other in two or more nucleotide, to produce a library of recombinant nucleic acids.